Home

Korg 2E ii Electronic Keyboard User Manual

1. FS a eepe los Jm 1 J 3 11 13 1 SW 1 key SW2 key These keys are on off switches for the functions to which they were assigned in Program Combination Sequencer and Sampling modes if the EXB SMPL option is installed When on the key will light vs p 24 2 Joystick This controls pitch or modulation etc Move the joystick up down or left right Y Y X X to control p 24 Various program parameters and effect parameters will determine what is controlled by the joystick 3 Headphone jack A set of headphones with a 1 4 stereo phone plug can be connected here The output from the L MONO and R OUTPUT jacks can be monitored in stereo through the headphones 4 VOLUME slider This adjusts the volume that is output from the OUT PUT jacks L MONO R and the headphone jack 5 REALTIME CONTROLS REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT AO IPFCUTOFF RESONANCE HPF EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE BO ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE 2 ASSIGNABLE 3 ASSIGNABLE 4 44 4 ARP GATE ARP VELOCITY TEMPOO og db QB Use the SELECT key to select realtime controller mode A B C and use knobs 1 4 to control the tone effects MIDI
2. FA 12 md C imm Q NN o Q iu r O r Q mm C gt INN o Q 5 Connecting pedals etc z Powered monitors etc AC9V USB cable computer nuvo oureut ovon NEZ Connection to a computer to an AC outlet ACIAC power supply Headphones Connecting the power cable Connecting MIDI equipment T o 1 sal o INPUT PHONES ARMA ag ven eee ae mere a Connecting audio output devices fa 3 wine Connecting audio output devices De ee eee OUTPUT INPUT oou eos 2 g ra Ej ET VW I6 EDEBBB oa 8 588585 3 Connecting pedals etc Foot pedal connections A foot pedal can be connected to control the volume or other functions Connect a separately sold Korg assignable pedal such as the XVP 10 EXP VOL or EXP 2 to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack The function controlled by the foot pedal is specified in GLOBAL 1 1 3 System Foot page Foot Pedal Assign p 117 PG p 127 227 Foot switch connections A foot switch controls sostenuto soft pedal on off arpeggiator on off to select programs or combina tions and to start stop the sequencer etc Connect a separately sold Korg foot switch such as the PS 1 to the rear
3. 48 RPPR ona 31 Lock function sss 24 Lo0pzcuceic eet 40 Samplez sensisse neun 92 SOngsosusteenier espe 66 Loop the playback 39 SON guessed 63 Low Pass amp High Pass 52 Low pass filter 53 Low Pass Resonance 52 LPECUTOPEFE ees 25 M MAIN L MONO R 9 Manual sampling 89 128 Master effect 113 Combination Sequencer 114 Progra ennen 113 Sampling e 114 Master EQ eee 112 Combination Sequencer 114 Program mises 113 Sampling oen 114 Master track esses 64 MIDI Channel Combination sss 59 Progranr e 49 MIDI Clock 28 83 104 111 MIDI connector esses 9 MIDI data filer MIDI filter ei MIDI pitch bend data Mode REC Mode Mode Sample Mode Monaural source Monophonic eee Multisample 1 36 37 38 50 87 97 N Note Number eee 26 0 Octave asisdeeeeines 24 28 32 60 Arpeggiator sssss 104 on off Organization Combination sesees 57 Program Sampling nee Sequencer sss Original scale OSG Select iE Oscillator
4. MEDIA MODE Combination mode Select and play combinations A combination is a set of two or more programs a maximum of eight and allows you to produce complex sounds that could not be created by an individual program You can choose combinations from rewritable banks A B and C which contain a total of 384 combina tions Edit a combination Make settings for volume pan layer split etc for each timbre program and make settings for effects and the two arpeggiators etc Sequencer mode Use the 16 track sequencer to record and playback songs Make effect settings for the song Youcan record a performance using the arpeggiator s into a song or pattern Youcan use a cue list to set up consecutive playback of multiple songs and specify the number of repeats for each song Youcan use a maximum of 20 cue lists 200 songs and 150 preset patterns One song can use as many as 100 patterns The TR can be used as a 16 track multitimbral tone generator PROGRAM MODE Multi Sample H Insert Master Effect Drum Kit Multi Sample L PITCH1 FILTER1 AMP1 Multi Sample H C mrx2 PITCH2 AMP2 COMBINATION MODE P TIMBRE 1 PROGRAM ee Insert Master Effect TIMBRE 2 PROGRAM TIMBRE 3 PROGRAM TIMBRE 4 PROGRAM TIMBRE 5 PROGRAM TIMBRE 6 PROGRAM Arpeggiator A Arpeggiatpr B TIMBRE 7 PROGRAM
5. 93 Multisample editing e 94 Editing the indices sss 94 Modifying the settings of an index 94 Converting a multisample to a program 94 Using Time Slice to divide a sample and play it in Sequencer mode e 95 Global mode e 97 Creating a drum kit eeee 97 About drum kits sss 97 Editing a drum kit sss 98 Media mode e LOO How Media mode is organized 100 Media that can be used 100 Formatting media eeeeee 100 SD card handling ee 100 About the write protect setting of an SD card wren 100 Loading data enn 101 Types of data that can be loaded 101 Data loading procedure 101 Saving data wee 102 Types of data that can be saved 102 Arpeggiator settings 103 Arpeggiator settings for a program 103 Arpeggiator on off sssssssesess 103 Arpeggiator settings 103 Linking the arpeggiator to a program 105 Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes nne 105 Arpeggiator on off sss 105 Arpeggiator settings 105 Linking the arpeggiator to the combination sse 106 Creating a user arpeggio pa
6. When you finish playing press the START STOP key Recording will end and the location will return to the point at which you begin recording At this time if you press the PAUSE key instead of the START STOP key recording will pause When you press the PAUSE once again recording will resume When you are finished press the START STOP key to stop recording Overdub With this method the newly recorded musical data is added to the existing data When you perform overdub recording on a previ ously recorded track the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data Itis best to select this method when you wish to add control data or to record tempo data onto the mas ter track This lets you record data without erasing the existing data D Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Over Dub SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page REC Setup 001 D1 Um Meter 4 d D Reso REC Setup Over Dub B Em 188 Manu a MEGT ish pe Matt Multi REC uy Precount 2 Level 127 BUS L R T81 AOZO Stondard kiti rios nel eros 2M reg tel rin Whine pret OM 9 For the rest of the procedure refer to steps of Overwrite ic functions mode 81 82 Manual punch in While the song is playing you can press the REC WRITE key or a connected pedal switch at the desired location to start or stop recording With this m
7. Select the MS Multisample Select Manual sampling step Select the sample in SMPL Sample Select that you wish to record Manual sampling step Select the 1 1 Recording Recording page Set the Mode Sample Mode Manual sampling Press the REC WRITE key Press the START STOP key When the input signal exceeds the Threshold level sampling will begin automatically Sampling will stop when you press the START STOP key amp Sampling will end automatically if the remaining amount of memory reaches zero O Either press the AUDITION key or press the C2 key The sample you recorded will play back Creating multisample indexes and sampling Here s how to create indexes for a multisample and how to assign a sample to each index D Select the 1 1 Recording Sample page MS Multisample Select Index Keyboard amp Index SMPL 1 1 Recording Samp Te Muttisand eselect MS EERE Er EEE Index 661 661 no tinm iid ge SMPL 6661 NewSample 6661 Orig K C2 TopK B2 Lsampiel Rec Mingrres 8 oa UNIS Create Select MS Multisample Select and create a multisample Refer to Manual sampling 3 Press the F6 CREATE key to create an index Immediately after the power is turned on the Index will be indicated as 001 001 This means that there is only one index The range that is high lighted in
8. Master Effect settings 7 2 Ed MasterFX Indicates master effects and make settings for them Here you can also make master EQ settings p 114 ic functions Combination mode 61 62 Auto Song Setup function This function automatically applies the settings of the current combination to a new song If inspiration for a phrase or song strikes you while you re playing a combination you can use this func tion to start recording immediately Hold down the ENTER key and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key The Setup to Record dialog box will open and ask Are you sure Press F8 OK key You will automatically enter Sequencer mode and will be in the record ready state Press the START STOP key to start the sequencer and begin recording Sequencer mode This instrument contains a 16 multi track MIDI sequencer The sequencer is the center to which TR s numerous functions are integrated allowing it to be used in a variety of situations including music produc tion and live performance A When you turn off the power the settings made in Sequencer mode and the song data cue list data and user pattern data that you recorded are not backed up If you wish to keep this data you must save it on external media SD card etc before turning off the power or perform a MIDI data dump to save the data on an external data filer etc If you wish to save the programs track parame ters effects and arp
9. If you are able to switch the mode setting of your MO drive between DOS V PC AT and Mac settings please use DOS V PC AT mode For details on changing the mode of your drive refer to the owner s manual for your MO drive Use the Media mode Media Information page utility Scan SCSI device to remount the SCSI device If your MO drive does not have a mode setting or if the media exchange is not recognized even after you switch the mode use the drive select button to select a different drive and then re select the MO drive Can t install the driver included CD ROM Is the USB cable connected correctly Is the CD ROM inserted in your CD drive Make sure that the CD ROM is inserted correctly Could the lens of your CD drive be dirty Use a commercially available lens cleaner to clean the lens Are you attempting to install from a network CD drive This software cannot be installed from a network connected CD drive Are you able to use USB If you are using Windows XP go to Control Panel System and select the Hardware tab In Device Manager check the settings for Universal Serial Bus Controller and USB Root Hub Has the TR been detected as an unknown device If you are using Windows XP go to Control Panel System select the Hardware tab and check Device Manager If the TR has not been detected correctly it will be displayed in Other devices or Unknown devices Reconnect the USB
10. Oscillator Mode P Page menu uec 11 Pan Program iicccnoeeneee 54 Sampling een 89 Sequencers 70 Patteri e en 64 Pattern Assignable 31 PCG fils eines 102 Pedal connection 9 Combination Drum kit us Program Sampling oe Sequencer nseeeeees Pitch BPM Adj 94 Pitch EG Pitch Offset Pitch Stretch sss 32 Playback pitch 51 60 Polyphonic Portamento Preload data PRELOAD PCG 20 Preset data eR 42 Preset pattern ssss 64 PROG BANK Program Effective oae Organization sese 49 Sequencer ehe 78 Q Quantize esee 67 R REALTIME CONTROLS 5 25 26 28 29 32 51 59 119 Realtime recording 16 81 Auto punclwin 82 Loop All Tracks 82 Manual punch in 82 Multi ceu 83 Overd b moche 81 Overwrite eeseeeeeee 81 Pattern i ettet 84 Rear panel sse 8 Recording Sample Auto xatd 35 Man al saanman 39 Recording Song Arpeggio pattern 67 Bass track Patterns ences Track Recording level Rename eec Resolution Resonance sees
11. Press the keys corresponding to the following function buttons to edit the multisample by changing the number or order of the indexes To delete the selected index press the CUT The INSERT is used in conjunction with the Cut and Copy The contents of the index that was Cut or Copied will be inserted The CREATE has the same function as the CRE ATE in 1 1 Recording Sample r p 91 Creating multisample indexes and sampling Modifying the settings of an index CD Make the settings described in steps 1 3 of Editing the indices Set parameters for the selected index PG p 118 e Changing the Editl page Top K Top Key will change the upper limit of the zone Simultaneously the lower limit of the next numbered index will also change If you check Constant Pitch in the Edit2 page playing any note within the zone of an index will always sound the original pitch Edit2 page Pitch adjusts the sample pitch for each index You can use the Utility menu command Pitch BPM Adj to set the loop interval to a desired BPM value ss PG p 119 SMPL 4 1 Multisample MS EEE T Edit2 Multisampleselect Index 661 662 ao ENTENTY Gd ddl ce Level 66 Pitch 88 88 OConstant Pitch Eat Jest TEE ES CEDAR ZI UTR Converting a multisample to a program The Utility menu command Conv To Prog can be selected and executed in the various pages of 1 1 Recording in 2 1 Sample Ed
12. You can select the base key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard Sample waveform data editing Editing the waveform data of the sample is done in 2 1 Sample Edit You can use commands such as cut copy and normalize to edit the waveform data CD Select the sample that you wish to edit Use SMPL Sample Select or Index in the 2 1 Sample Edit Edit 1 page or the 1 1 Recording Sam ple page to select the sample vs p 91 amp If you use SMPL Sample Select to select the sample be aware that the index assignment will also change Select the 2 1 Sample Edit Edit2 page SMPL 2 1 Sample Edit Edit2 EditRangeStart 66 zero Js i Ee UH The waveform data of the currently selected sample will be displayed note The waveform display of a sample that was sam pled with a Mode Sample Mode setting of Stereo can be switched between the L and R wave forms by pressing the F3 L R key When you do so L or R will be displayed alternately in the upper right Use S EditRangeStart and E EditRangeEnd to specify the range that you wish to edit The selected range will be highlighted SMPL 2 1 Sample Edit Edit2 EditRangeEnd If you wish to hear the sound of the selected range press the START STOP key The selected range will play back at the pitch of the base key the key shown in gray on the keyboard display You can select the base
13. etc to add accents to the rhythm pattern A The Gt Gate and Vel Velocity settings you make here will be valid if the Gate and Veloc ity parameters PROG 6 1 Ed Arp Arpeg Setup page of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gt Gate and Vel Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and all notes of the arpeggio will sound according to the specified gate and velocity 110 amp Before you set Gate move the REALTIME CON TROLS C mode ARP GATE knob to the center position 12 o clock Before you set Velocity move the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode ARP VELOCITY knob to the center position 12 o clock Dual arpeggiator editing Here we will use a combination as an example in our explanation The same procedure applies when editing an arpeggio pattern in Sequencer mode If you have entered this mode from the Combination mode the arpeggio pattern selected by the combina tion will be affected by your editing D In Combination mode select a combination that uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit For this example select a combination to which arpeggiators A and B is assigned 2 Press the ARP ON OFF key to turn on the arpeg giator the key will light Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when you moved here you can use the ARP ON OFF key to turn it on However
14. CD Press the F2 Rec key to access the SMPL 1 1 Recording Recording page SMPL 1 1 Recording Becoraing Pre Trigger REC Sample Setup ssi nes E NER 2 In REC Setup set Mode REC Mode to Manual to specify how recording will begin fe As an alternative to setting Mode REC Mode to Manual and recording manually you can select Auto for automatic recording Recording can be performed using either method p 35 9 In Sample Setup set Mode Sample Mode to Stereo With this setting the sound of the internal LR chan nels can be sampled in stereo 39 Quick Start Sampling recording a sample 40 4 Record the sample D Press the F1 Sample key to access the SMPL 1 1 Recording Sample page TE Index 001 7 001 eo Mibi TIE HEEL HI es SMPL No Rssigh Orig K C2 Top NIE Lampie l Rec ungere TS Press the REC WRITE key At the moment that you wish to start sampling press the START STOP key Sampling will start nole Itis a good idea to allow a bit of extra time before you start and after you stop sampling At the moment that you wish to stop sampling press the START STOP key Sampling will stop A 140 BPM drum phrase has now been sampled The sample will automatically be assigned to SMPL amp Sampling will stop automatically if the remaining amount of memory reaches zero Listen to the sampled sound and assig
15. Frequency pitch Frequency pitch Level Level Basic page PROG 4 1 Ed Filter1 Basic Filter1 Type fife s P bacis MModt Jupes J ssrisq Ez 7 TIS Filter Type Filter A Filter B Selects the type of filter and specify the Frequency cutoff frequency and Resonance resonance level Low Pass Resonance 24 dB oct low pass filter with resonance Make settings for filter A Low Pass amp High Pass 12 dB oct low pass filter and 12 dB oct high pass filter in series connection Make low pass filter settings in filter A and high pass filter settings in filter B When resonance is applied Low Pass Level F T T T Low resonance value gt gt High resonance value Low pass filter This is the most common type of filter which passes the low frequency range and cuts the high frequency range When the overtones of the high range are cut a bright sound will become darker more mellow 24 dB oct and 12 dB oct refer to the steepness of the cut 24 dB oct means that the gain will decrease 24 dB in one octave i e as the frequency doubles A 12 dB oct filter would decrease the gain 12 dB in one octave The 24 dB oct filter produces a steeper cut Low Pass Level 12dB oct 24dB oct Frequency High pass filter This type of filter passes the high frequency range and cuts the low frequency range Use this when you wish to make the
16. Press the F8 OK key to execute the copy 3 As described in steps 1 and create one more new song S002 and copy song S000 to it 2 Naming a song Here s how to assign a name to a song you created CD Choose Song Select and use the VALUE control ler to select a song For this example select song 002 In the SEQ 1 1 Play REC page select the Utility menu command Rename Song and press the F8 OK Key Rename Song 882 Rcid Jazz A dialog box will appear Press the F5 Name key to access the text dialog box Press the F1 Clear key and input CHORUS vs p 44 When you are finished inputting the name press the F8 OK key Press the F8 OK key once again to execute the Rename operation As described in steps 1 and assign a name of INTRO to S000 and VERSE to S001 3 Setting the number of measures in the song Here s how to specify the number of measures in the song When the power is turned on this is set to 64 measures If you realtime record for more measures than this the song will be the length of the measures you recorded CD Select song S000 INTRO 2 Select the SEQ 5 2 Track Edit page In the SEQ 5 2 Track Edit page press the MENU key to access the page menu select the F5 TEdit key and then select F8 Open SER 5 2 Track Edit Measure From Lead Synth From To End of M EERI M 403 I UU Press
17. Sampling recording a sample If the EXB SMPL option sold separately is installed you will be able to record 48 KHz 16 bit stereo samples Sampled sounds can be used in a program combina tion or song Here we will explain the process of making sampling settings recording the actual sample saving it and converting a multisample into a program We will also explain how a sample such as a drum phrase can be played back repeatedly For other procedures and more detailed explanations refer to p 88 and PG p 89 In order to perform the steps described below the EXB SMPL option must be installed PG p 260 Sampling a sound and playing it back as one shot 1 Connecta mic and make input settings D Turn off the power Then turn it on again When you turn off the power all unsaved sample data will be erased If you want to keep any of the sample data save it before you continue m This explanation assumes that you are starting from the initial power on state 2 Connect a mic to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack located on the rear panel of the EXB SMPI Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the MIC position and set the LEVEL knob to the cen ter EXB SMPL AUDIO INPUT LEVEL MIC UNE MAX MIN 2 HOO e MIC Press the SAMPLING key to enter Sampling mode A If the EXB SMPL option is not installed the dis play will indicate No Sampling Upgrade Installed and it
18. key Set the Resolution For this example select A 16th note Begin realtime recording Length You can record in the same way as you did when recording tracks with Loop All Tracks r p 82 Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key After the pre count pattern recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate the joystick and other controllers to record your performance When you reach the end of the pattern you will return to the beginning of the pattern and continue recording If you continue recording the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data If you want to delete specific data while you con tinue pattern recording you can press the REC WRITE key or check the Remove Data check box For details refer to step of Loop All Tracks p 82 Press the START STOP key to stop recording If you made a mistake or decide to re record press the START STOP key to stop recording and press the COMPARE key Using the arpeggiator for pattern recording If the arpeggiator is set to operate for the track that is selected for Track Select you can turn on the ARP ON OFF key and record the performance of the arpeggiator into the pattern For details on arpeggiator settings refer to p 76 and PG p 82 Control data in pattern recording A To record control data in a pattern you should restore the control data to its n
19. 94 Continue sounding 108 Controller sss 24 COPY onnu 78 Copy Key Setup 98 Create Control Data 84 Crossfade LOOP 86 Cue List sss 20 64 73 Current page occ 10 Cutoff frequency 25 53 D Damper effect 13 DAMPER jack 9 Data dump 42 47 Data fil r ies 120 Decay Time esee 32 Detune sound ssssss 51 Dialoge oceanus 11 Driod othetateeenceeti 115 Double ss Drum kit esses Dual arpeggiator Dynamic Modulation 1 63 115 E Edit Combination sss 57 Pattern dit usu 72 Progra erret 49 Song edit 72 Track edit sss 72 Edit B ffer ess 44 Edit cell s 7 10 16 Effect Combination Sequencer 112 Programas 112 Sampling ns 112 i e 52 Amp Amplifier EG 54 EG INTENSITY 25 EG RELEASE ss 25 Filter EG rette 53 Pitch EG esses 52 Event Edit sus 17 84 EXB SMPL 1 2 9 42 86 Excl Group Exclusive Group 99 EXIT KEY oett 7 External media 102 External SCSI storage media 100 F Filter EG etes 53 Filter Modulation 53
20. If you edit while the COMPARE key is lit the key will go dark That sound will be the sound that is recalled when the COMPARE key is dark Oscillator settings 2 1 Ed Basic In 2 1 Ed Basic you can make oscillator related set tings This instrument provides two oscillators and for each oscillator you can select a basic waveform mul tisample and set the pitch The multisamples pro vided by this instrument include waveforms for musical instruments such as pianos as well as special waveforms unique to synthesizers Multisamples reproduce the complex overtone structure and fre quency characteristics that allow us to identify a sound as being piano like or guitar like Basic Prog Basic page PROG 2 1 Ed Basic Prog Basic Oscillator Mode Oscillator Mode E S OSingle Trigger rjLegato Priority Last Scale Type Equal Temperament Key C Random 8 Lazic fL osct Mosc Wu zone Ludi TIT Voice fissign Mode Poly OH Mode Oscillator Mode This sets the mode of the oscillator Single uses one oscillator and Double uses two oscilla tors In the case of Single the maximum polyphony is 62 notes and in the case of Double the maximum polyphony is 31 notes If you wish to use a Drum Kit to create a drums program select Drums p 51 Mode Voice Assign Mode Indicates whether the program will sound in Poly polyphonically or Mono monophonically If this is set to Poly you will be able to play ch
21. If you specify a Low Drumsample use Vel SW LH to specify how velocity will switch between the High Drumsample and the Low Drumsample e Set Drumsample Bank to ROM or EX if you want to select ROM samples Set Drumsample Bank to RAM if you want to select samples that were recorded in Sampling mode or loaded in Media mode using the EXB SMPL option About ROM drumsamples This instrument contains 518 drumsamples in its inter nal memory You can use the Utility Select by Category to select ROM drum samples from fifteen categories For the drumsample names refer to the separate VNL Use Vel SW L gt H to specify how velocity will switch between drumsamples The drumsample that sounds when you perform will depend on the velocity keyboard playing strength of the incoming note This is called veloc ity drumsample switching If you set this to 001 only the High Drumsample will sound This is the same type of function as the Velocity Multisample Switching in a program p 50 High Multisample and Low Multisample Set the parameters of the drumsamples that you assigned Set the High Drumsample parameters in the High Sample page and the Low Drumsample parameters in the Low Sample page You can set parameters such as volume level Level pitch Trans Tune and tone Fc Reso For details on each parameter refer to PG p 134 As necessary repeat step
22. On this instrument you can use one of the following two methods to select programs by category Select by Category CD Make sure that PROG 1 1 Play is displayed 2 Press the CATEGORY key CATEGORY The Select by Category dialog box will appear The categories are displayed in the left side of the screen and a list of the programs in the selected category are displayed in the right side MIE 6000 Bi9 Sweep Stab 815 B816 Rez Sweep Program Category Use the F1 tat 41 F2 got 41 F3 Lat and F4 Lest 31 keys to select the desired category Use the a v cursor keys to select the desired program To execute press the F8 OK key To cancel without executing press the F7 Cancel key Cat HOLD Category Hold CD Press the HOLD key to display tat HOLD The category will be held Category PROG 1 1 Pla Program Proara Category 16 FastSynth 2 Use the cursor keys a v gt to choose Category and use the VALUE controllers to specify the category 8 Use the cursor keys a v gt to choose Program Select and use the VALUE controllers to successively select programs in that category To exit the Category Hold function press the HOLD key twice to erase the display ES In PROG 1 1 Play pressing the HOLD key will cycle through um mp cancel Using 10 s HOLD to select programs You can fix the
23. Recording Mode to Over Write Select the 1 1 Play REC Program page For all tracks the PLAY MUTE REC indication will show REC The track played by RPPR will be recorded simulta neously with the track played by the arpeggiator Set PLAY MUTE REC to PLAY or MUTE for all tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 which we will be recording Make sure that Track Select is set to T02 Bass Your keyboard playing on keys not assigned to the RPPR function can be recorded on the track speci fied by Track Select 001 1 OU Meter 4 4 d BEN Hi P 390 Manu Bass Fl Gui EL COSE i ABBS Bir aca R939 EH Lao H coc JOE OCT Ja fE rer Toz ira EMiS Techno lox box COE In the 1 1 Play REC Play REC page make sure that the RPPR check box is checked 001 01 DUU Meter 474 Reso Hi 000 Hip Hop Rap FE 090 Manu I RPPR TOG b Ui5 Techno Vox Box gt Chi i 6 Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key Press a key that plays an RPPR pattern and one or more keys that play the arpeggiator If you press a key during the pre count before recording the pattern playback and arpeggio per formance will begin simultaneously when recording begins and will be recorded Record the RPPR pattern playback and arpeggio performance A When recording the playback of patterns triggered by RPPR the timing of the recorded events ma
24. This type of problem may occur if a data writing operation to internal memory was not completed correctly for example if the power of the TR was turned off while a program or other data was being written If this occurs use the following procedure to initialize the TR s internal memory D Turn off the power Hold down the MENU key and the 9 key and turn on the power The TR will be initialized and data will be written into internal memory While the data is being writ ten the LCD screen will indicate Now writing into internal memory When using the BPM MIDI Sync function to control the delay time of an effect noise may occur in the delay sound This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay sound and is not a malfunction When using an effect on the external audio source being input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 oscillation may occur depending on the type of effect or on the parameter settings Please adjust the input level output level and effect parameters You need to be particularly careful when using a high gain effect After a sample edit has been executed or after a stereo sample has been recorded a small noise may be heard This has no effect on the audio data that was edited or sampled Effects are not applied Are the GLOBAL 1 1 System Basic page IFX Off MFX1 Off or MFX2 Off settings checked age te cece ANUS PG p 124 125 Are connections made correctly to your
25. Write protect switch Loading data Types of data that can be loaded The data that can be loaded from external media e g SD card is shown in the diagram below For details on each type of data refer to PG p 141 If the EXB SMPL option is installed data can also be loaded from media such as a hard disk or CD ROM m th DOS directory Undefined DOS file Files that can be loaded DOS files PCG file i All programs 1 program i bank A D Aa 4m nm NF All combinations 1 combination bank A C Data loading procedure Loading Programs Combinations Drum kits User arpeggio patterns and Global settings loading a PCG file As an example here s how to load a PCG file A PCG file contains programs combinations drum kits user arpeggiator patterns and global settings see diagram below Select this if you have used Save All or Save PCG to save your own original programs and combinations and want to reload this data A If you want to load programs combinations songs user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns you must first uncheck the memory protect setting in Global mode p 43 D If you are loading data from SD card insert the SD card into the SD card slot For details on handling SD cards please refer to Cautions when handling an SD card If the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed and you are loading data from a hard disk or other external SCSI device ref
26. You can use the C4 and higher keys to play con ventionally along with the arpeggio sounded by the B3 and lower keys To change the arpeggio play keys in the range of B3 and below Vel Btm Vel Top The arpeggiator will operate when you play notes with a velocity playing strength that is within the specified range Notes played with a velocity outside this range will be sounded normally without regard to the arpeggia tor on off 6 If you wish to save the edited program settings to internal memory turn off memory protect in Glo bal mode and write the program p 43 Linking the arpeggiator to a program If you want the arpeggiator settings written in a pro gram to be selected when that program is selected check Program for Auto Arp GLOBAL 1 1 System Basic page Arpeggiator settings in Combina tion and Sequencer modes In Combination and Sequencer modes the TR pro vides dual arpeggiator functionality that lets you use two arpeggio patterns simultaneously The settings in each of these modes are made in the similar way As an example the following explanation shows how to make settings in Combination mode For a detailed explanation and example settings v PG p 43 82 The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the fol lowing things Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre Choose from Off arpeggiator A or arpeggiator B wstep Independently specify whether A and B will operate
27. and press the DEC key once again Select the track 1 and 2 SOLO On Off and press the DEC key once each The display will change and the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be muted If the Solo function is turned off for all tracks playback will be according to the PLAY MUTE REC settings nofe By using the Utility menu command Solo Selected Track you can listen to the sound of only the selected track This is convenient when you want to set track parameters or to make effect settings r PG p 51 LO CATE settings By pressing the LOCATE key you can move to a specified location The location is specified by the Utility menu command Set Location You can also hold down the ENTER key and press the LOCATE key to set the location even during playback PG p 54 Normally you will set this to 001 01 000 You will return to the beginning of the song When you select a song the LOCATE setting will automatically be set to 001 01 000 Making track settings for a new song Here s how to make basic settings for a new song such as assigning a program to each track and setting the volume etc You can check these settings for the tem plate song you loaded earlier 1 Assign a program to each track SEQ 1 1 Play REC Program page Prost GE ron roster GE C GC Tat EN its s Pro zl EF Ch Play REC Prog 2llproa tef Miz 2 rtis ie JL Prec T DSE In the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Program page use Pro gra
28. 488 m Key Transpose 66 Velocity Curve 4 No RfterT Curve A dialog box will appear Use the INC DEC keys to select the data that you want to load Load Preload Demo Data Kind EGOE In the Kind field select the data that you want to load In this case select All Preload PCG and Demo Songs When you execute the Load operation the demo song data and preloaded data will be loaded Press the F8 OK key A dialog box will ask you for confirmation Load Preload Demo Data fire you sure Press the F8 OK key once again The preloaded data and demo song data will be loaded A Never turn off the power while the data is being loaded amp If the Memory Protected dialog box appears un check the memory protect setting and perform the Load operation again p 43 noe From the powered off state if you turn on the power while holding down the MENU key and EXIT key the Load All Preload PCG and Demo Songs operation will be executed automatically The LCD screen will show a message of Now Writing Internal Memory This will load all PCG data and demo song data Never turn off the power while the data is being loaded Selecting and playing a demo song in the Sequencer mode D Press the SEO key the key will light You will enter Sequencer mode 2 Access the SEO 1 1 Play REC Play REC page Play REC page SEQ 1 1 PayREC 001 01 O
29. 9 Now let s change the program of timbre 2 to a dif ferent program Use the cursor keys a 4 v gt to select Program Select for timbre 2 it will be high lighted Prog Proaram Select Betty Be Arou LEST Ral Ez Program 12 A120 A126 A120 Select Status INT th ch Loic Pro Cae eromen e m L Timbre 1 Timbre 2 You can directly select the program for a timbre by holding down the TIMBRE TRACK key and pressing the nearest F1 F8 key You can select pan or volume in the same way For this example select D003 Legato Strings This is a layered combination with piano and rich strings Then consecutively press the D key the 3 key and the ENTER key Alternatively the program for a timbre can be selected by category Choose Program Select and press the CATE GORY key The Select by Category dialog box will appear Category ProgT2 Cat 43 Strings a Eetzyseed fezt e Use the F1 at 1 F2 Et 41 F3 Eat 1 and F4 L at 31 keys to select the desired category For example if you want to select string type programs rather than the 00 Keyboard category shown in the above display press the F2 Eat 41 key three times to select 03 Strings You can use the cursor keys a v to successively select string type programs When you are happy with the selected program press the F8 OK key to finalize your selection
30. Assignable Foot Pedal 26 Assignable Foot Switch 26 ASSIGNABLE Pedal 2 ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack 9 ASSIGNABLE Switch 117 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack 9 Assigning a name 44 AUDIO INPUT 4 9 14 35 39 87 88 89 112 114 115 121 123 125 AUDIO OUTPTUT 2 8 12 Audition function sss 7 Audition riff esses 7 Auto Pan 54 Auto sampling sss 89 Auto Song Setup 56 62 B BANK Keys etes 7 Base key usescsceos eee 93 Bit resolution sess 87 BPM 60 92 BPM Adjust function 86 Broken chord s 27 Index BUS Select AUDIO INPUT 115 Combination Sequencer 114 Propran respinsa 112 SaM PNE ireren 89 C Cat HOLD Category Hold 22 Categoty inunan 7 Category Hold 16 Drumsample 98 Check box ete 10 CLIPE iit 39 COMBI BANK Combination Effect 2e Organization sss 57 Compare function Combination ss 58 Program Sequencet iisi 80 Connection AC AC power supply 12 Audio equipment 12 Audio input Damper pedal 13 Foot switch 13 MIDI equipment computer 13 Pedale 13 Constant Pitch
31. F8 OK key the display will ask Are you sure Press the F8 OK key once again to write the data Using the REC WRITE key to write D In the following pages press the REC WRITE key A dialog box will appear Global settings GLOBAL 1 14 1 User drum kits GLOBAL 5 1 User arpeggio patterns GLOBAL 6 1 The example shown is for Update Arpeggio Patterns Update firpeggio Patterns fire you sure 2 To execute the Write operation press the F8 OK key To cancel press the F7 Cancel key Memory in Global mode When the power is turned on the Global mode data is called from internal memory into the Global mode memory area Then when you modify the parameters in Global mode the data in the memory area will be modified If you wish to save this modified data in internal memory you must Write it When you write the data in the memory area will be written into the global settings drum kits and arpeg gio patterns of internal memory If you turn off the power without writing the modified data in the memory area will be lost Editing will affect the data that has been called into the memory area lt Edit Memory Area When you write the various Global mode settings will When the power is turned be saved in internal Write Power On op the settings are called memory into the memory area Internal Memory Arpeggio Global Setting Drum Kit Pattern ic
32. Here we will explain how to play a demo song using the RPPR function D Load the demo song data as described in Loading demo playback data rs p 19 2 Press the SEO key the key will light to enter Sequencer mode and access the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Play REC page In Song Select select 001 Midnight Sun Select the song as described in Selecting and play ing a demo song in Sequencer mode rsp 19 001 HER OU Meter d 4 Beso Hi eC 120 Ruto 001 Midnight Sun z RPPR T81 TRACK 61 T81 COOd HiptHop Kit etas RE Make sure that the RPPR check box is checked Checked The specified RPPR set in SEQ 5 1 PPPR RPPR Setup will function Unchecked RPPR will not function Operation will be as in normal Sequencer mode 5 Press a key The pattern assigned to that key will playback In some cases the pattern will continue playing after you release your hand from the keyboard You can stop playback either by pressing that key once again or by pressing a key in the area of C2 or below Shutdown Keys When you play a key in the range of C 1 C2 the cur rently playing pattern will stop Pattern Assignable A pattern and track can be assigned to each of the 72 keys in the range of C 2 C8 If you do not assign a key it can be used to play as usual As in the example shown in the following diagram you can make one key play a drums pattern another key a bass phrase and yet an
33. IFX Off check box To turn off master effect 1 check the MFX1 Off check box To turn off master effect 2 check the MEX2 Off check box Specifying the function of the Assignable Switch and Assign able Pedal Set the assignable function of a footswitch such as the Korg PS 1 connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack This switch can act as a source for alternate modula tion or effect dynamic modulation or switch porta mento on off control the sostenuto effect turn the soft pedal effect on off turn the arpeggiator on off select programs or combinations up down start stop the sequencer punch in out on the sequencer or be a trig ger to advance the cue list step r PG p 226 This setting is made in GLOBAL 1 1 System Foot page Foot SW Assign ic functions You can specify the assignable function that will be performed by a footpedal such as the Korg XVP 10 EXP VOL or EXP 2 connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack This pedal can be used to control master volume alter nate modulation or effect dynamic modulation porta mento pitch change speed volume the pan following an insert effect pan volume or send levels to the mas ter effects r PG p 227 This setting is made in GLOBAL 1 1 System Foot page Foot Pedal Assign Other functions noe You can use this as a source for alternate modula tion or effect dynamic modulation and use it to control program parameters or effect paramet
34. IX UNDNUA You can listen to the sampled sound by playing the Orig K note or pressing the AUDITION key 3 Press the F6 CREATE key to create a new index Press the REC WRITE key Press the START STOP key Speak the word that you want to sample Exam ple So When you finish speaking press the START STOP key to stop sampling Repeat steps 3 and 4 to record additional sam ples Example Easy To Sample With TR 6 Play consecutive notes on the keyboard Play a chromatic scale upward starting at the C2 key The samples you recorded will be played one after another In this example playing notes C2 through F 2 in sequence will produce It s So Easy To Sample With TR Using the insert effect while you sample D In step of the preceding section 1 Connect a mic and make input settings set the Input1 Pan to C064 and BUS to IFX Press the MENU to access the PAGE MENU gt a Se Press the F7 IFX key and then press the F8 Open key The SMPL 7 1 Insert Effect Setup page will appear Select and 3 Select Insert Effect use the numeric keys to enter 52 and press the ENTER key to confirm 52 Rev Hall Select IFX On Off and press the INC key to turn it ON SMPL 7 i insert Effect Setup IFx On Off 7 stu a Uni Speak into the mic and verify t
35. Meter 4 4 Tempo 120 RPPR On 001 NEW SONG C RPPR Tat Taree ith DOTZINeUMS oot Chat IOV REM Prog 2 Mprog tel Ming Mintel Fret A SEQ 1 1 Play REC Loop 8 page Track01 Loop On On Loop Start Meas 001 Loop End Meas 001 Play Intro Off SER 1 2 Loop Track Pla Loop AY i m If you set Start Measure to other than 001 when creating performance data in a track the parame ters and programs of the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Loop 8 page will not be set automatically Loop On will be Off and a program change will be cre ated at the beginning of the Start Measure e SEQ 5 2 Track Edit Track Edit page Track01 track data 8 measures D2 Event Edit T 1 TRACK 61 BAR M Ee Bt 61 606 PROG Bnk D No 972 Bt 61 661 D2 Vel 127 L 888 094 MGG1 663 Bt 01 095 D 2 Vel 127 L 000 096 M661 664__Bt 61 191 B81 888 When you press the SEDUENCER START STOP key playback will begin According to the Track Play Loop setting the first measure will play as a loop T81 TRACK 81 Ptau RE e SEQ 1 1 Play REC Prog 8 page Track01 Program D073 SER 1 1 Play REC Program Program Select 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 Reso Hi J 126 Manu Firozt e SEQ 5 1 RPPR RPPR Setup page Key C 2 Assign On Pattern User U00 Track Track01 Pattern data 1 measure D2 Pat User U PATTERN 66 M Manual Shift 66 Track T61 TRACK 61 Sync Beat BAR Me fe Maat 661 6t
36. START STOP key If you play a B3 note or lower during the pre count before recording the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning at the moment that recording begins Record your performance When you are finished performing press the START STOP key If you made a mistake or want to re record you can use the Compare function press the COMPARE key to re record as many times as you want The MultiREC check box will be unchecked when you use Compare so you will need to check it again If the recorded performance is not reproduced cor rectly during playback If you use the Utility menu command Copy From Combination to copy the settings of a combination and then perform multi track recording with the arpeggiator turned on there may be cases in which the performance during recording is not reproduced by the playback Multiple tracks that are set to the same MIDI channel are combined into a single stream of performance data during recording If there is a track with the same MIDI channel as the track being played by the arpeggiator the data played by the arpeggiator will be combined with the performance data that was played manually and all of this data will be sounded by each track of the same channel if Status is INT In such cases you can solve the problem by changing the MIDI channel of the track that is played by the arpeggiator and then creating a track that will drive the arpeggiator
37. Source BPM to 120 Press the F8 OK key The sample will be sliced automatically and the dia log box will appear Index Sourcecc2 Zero E 8836861 58000000 When you play the keyboard C2 will sound the original sample Source and the keys D2 and above will play the divided samples While you listen to each of the divided samples adjust Sensitivity so that each of the drums or percussion instruments are separated For some samples you may not be able to slice the samples cleanly by adjusting Sensitivity If the attack por tion of the next sample is heard at the end of a sam ple or if two sounds are heard in a single sample you will need to make further edits m To edit hold down the ENTER key and select the Index that is assigned to the key you want to edit That portion of the waveform display will be highlighted Then you can adjust S Start and E End use Divide to divide samples or use Link to join samples PG p 111 step 2 Press the F6 Save key The Save Smpl MS dialog box will appear From here you can save the time sliced samples and multisample At this time you can adjust the settings in the With area to specify which program will use the samples and multisample and the destination of the Sequencer mode performance data track or pat tern that will be used to playback the rhythm loop sample To create performance
38. Tab name Mode name Page number name P Plau fi combi Select b Tab Most pages are divided into two or more tabs By pressing the closest function key F1 F7 you can select a tab to access the corresponding page c Parameters The parameters for various settings are displayed in the LCD screen Use cursor keys a 4 v gt to select the desired parameter d Edit cell When you use the cursor keys a lt v gt the selected parameter will be highlighted in the LCD screen This area is called the edit cell and your editing will affect the highlighted area The parameter value of the edit cell can be modi fied using VALUE controllers such as the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys p 16 For parame ters that accept a key number or a velocity value you can also hold down the ENTER key and play a note on the keyboard to enter the key number or velocity value e Check box Use cursor keys a 4 v gt to select a check box edit cell and use a VALUE controller such as the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys to add or remove the check mark When checked the parameter will function when unchecked the parameter will not function 10 Function buttons By pressing the function key F1 F8 nearest this button you can turn various functions on off ELE Ul In Media mode these select the current directory Accesses the utility menu where you can execute utility menu
39. The process by which your playing on this instru ment s keyboard and controllers is captured on the tracks or patterns of a song as data is called record ing Recording a track and recording a pattern Recording a track There are two ways to record to a track realtime recording and step recording You can choose from a further six types of realtime recording In addition you can use event editing to modify data that has been recorded or to insert data and use track editing operations such as Create Control Data to insert data such as bend after touch and control changes Recording a pattern There are two ways to record a pattern realtime recording and step recording For realtime recording only one recording type loop is available In addition you can use event edit operations to mod ify data that has been recorded or to insert data The Utility menu command Get From Track can be used to take musical data from a desired area of a track and use it as the musical data for a pattern Con versely the Utility menu commands Put to Track and Copy to Track can be used to place or to copy the musical data of a pattern in a track Realtime recording This is a method of recording in which your playing on the keyboard and your operations of controllers such as the joystick are recorded in realtime This method of recording is normally used one track at a time and is called single track recording
40. and will automatically begin recording When the song ends stop the external sequencer This instrument s sequencer will receive the MIDI Stop message transmitted by the external sequencer and will automatically stop recording You can also press the START STOP key on this instrument itself to stop recording Playback In the GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI page set MIDI Clock to Internal Set Tempo Mode to Auto When you press the START STOP key playback will begin hotel If the correct sounds do not play immediately after playback is started you may be able to solve the problem by using the Utility menu command Event Edit SEQ 5 2 Track Edit to edit the Pro gram Change data ic functions mode 83 84 Step recording This is a method of recording where you specify the note timing note length and velocity etc in the LCD screen and use the keyboard to input the pitches p 67 Only note on off data can be recorded with this method Event Edit and Create Control Data Note data is the only type of data that can be recorded in step recording However there are ways to record other types of data aside from the realtime mode You can use the Event Edit and Create Control Data func tions Event Edit is intended as a way to edit previously recorded data but you can also use it to modify pro gram numbers or insert control changes Create Control Data is a function that lets you
41. istep Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters independently for A and B istep 7 Make Scan Zone page settings so that you can use keyboard range or playing velocity to switch between normal playing and arpeggiated playing or to switch between arpeggiators A and B estep 8 Make settings for timbres that will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off and will sound only when the arpeggiator is On step Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the ARP ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on or off When on the ARP ON OFF key will light The selected arpeggio pattern will begin when you play the keyboard The on off setting is saved when the combination is writ ten into memory If Assign is Off or Arpeggiator Run is not checked the arpeggiator will not operate even if this key is on Arpeggiator settings CD Select COMBI 2 1 Ed Prog Mix Prog page Select programs for the timbres that you wish to use For this example select any desired program for timbres 1 4 2 Select COMBI 3 1 Ed Paraml MIDI page For the timbres that you will be using set Status to INT and set MIDI Channel to Gch or to the global MIDI channel set in GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Channel For this example set timbres 1 4 to a Status of INT and timbres 5 8 to a Status of Off Set the MIDI Channel of timbres 1 4 to Gch COMBI 3 1 Ed Pararat Nia Fos 300K Een El strin RS MIDI Status E
42. nificantly it is possible that the distortion is occur ring before the AD converter Adjust the LEVEL knob or the output level of your external audio source Pan Set the panning of the signal from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 When you are inputting a stereo audio source you will normally set Input 1 to L000 and Input 2 to R127 or Input 1 to R127 and Input 2 to L000 When you are inputting a monaural audio source you will normally set this to C064 BUS IFX Indiv Select In the same way as for the oscillator of a program specify the bus to which the external audio source from AUDIO INPUT jacks 1 and 2 will be sent p 112 Send 1 Send 2 Specify the send levels from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 external input sound to the master effects in the same way as for the program oscillators This setting can be made only if BUS IFX Indiv Select is L R or Off p 113 If BUS IFX Indiv Select is set to IFX this is set by Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 Setup page after the sound has passed through the insert effect If BUS IFX Indiv Select is set to other than Off and Level is raised the external audio source will be input to the TR At this time if audio cables are connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks any noise component will be input to the TR even if there is no actual audio input and depending on the settings will be output from the AUDIO OUT PUT L MONO R 1 2 jacks If you are not
43. this instrument will not sound With settings of EXT or EX2 you can control an external tone generator con nected via MIDI PG p 36 MIDI Channel Timbres that you wish to play from this instrument s keyboard must be set to the global MIDI channel Your playing on the keyboard is transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will sound any timbre that matches this channel Normally you will set this to Gch When this is set to Gch the MIDI channel of the timbre will always match the global MIDI channel even if you change the global MIDI channel On some preloaded combinations that use the arpeggiator timbres assigned to the arpeggiator may not have a Status of INT and MIDI Ch of Gch The reason for this is that these settings are for tim bres that sound only when the arpeggiator is on This is a very useful technique for creating combi nations that use the arpeggiator Refer to Arpeg giator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes sp 105 PG p 43 and study the relation ship between arpeggiator assignments Status and MIDI Channel Basic functions Bank EX2 MSB Bank EX2 LSB This setting is valid when Status is set to EX2 It specifies the Bank Select message that will be transmit ted from this instrument OSC page Combination mode Tai A113 Romance Piano 4 I E Ut Force OSC Mode Normally you will set this to PRG If you wish to force a polyphonic program to s
44. 2 Track 3 Setup parameters Musical data 9 Track 4 Setup parameters Musical data __ Track 5 Setup parameters Musical data gt Insert Effect 71 3 4 AUDIO OUTPUT E7 gt MasterEQ 7 2 4 L MONO R Track 6 Setup parameters Track Musical data A Track 7 Setup parameters Musical data Insert Effect Master Effect Individual Outputs Track 8 Setup parameters Musical data Y Track 16 Setup parameters Musical data gt Master Track Tempo time signature data Ls AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 7 1 1 or 7 2 1 etc indicate pages or tab screens used on this instrument for editing Producing a song This section describes how to use the TR s sequencer As an example we will create a song by following the order outlined below Creating the basic song Here we will use the convenient functions of the TR s sequencer e g template songs preset patterns arpeg giator to perform realtime recording and step record ing Editing the song Here we will edit the song that we created in Creating the basic song Creating a cue list Here we will complete the song by creating a cue list for the song that we copied etc in Editing the song Creating the basic song 1 Loading a template song and
45. 53 Write7 8 30 32 34 42 43 49 57 97 Z Zero Use Zero 40 92 Zero CrOSSeS esececeeseeseeeseesseeseeeees 92 ZOOM eee e else 92 129 IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty 2005 KORG INC KORG INC 4015 2 Yanokuchi Inagi city Tokyo 206 0812 Japan
46. 88 key model 1414 x 365 x 123 mm Weight 61 key model 7 8kg 76 key model 9 2kg 88 key model 24 1kg Power consumption 13W if the EXB SMPL option and two 32Mbyte SIMM are installed Included items CD ROM KORG USB MIDI driver Voice Name List AC AC power supply 9VAC 3 0A O perating requirements for con nection to a computer Windows Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional Computer A computer with USB connector that meets the above requirements Macintosh Operating system Mac OS X 10 2 or later Computer An Apple Macintosh with USB connector that meets the requirements for the above operating system r O ptions Expansion board EXB SMPL Sampling upgrade Expression volume pedal XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal Foot controller EXP 2 Damper pedal DS 1H Pedal switch PS 1 Other MIDI cable Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice Aug 05 125 62 notes Music Workstation Sampler Date 2005 08 12 IR MIDI Implementation Chart Default Changed Basic Channel Recognized Remarks Memorized Memorized Messages Altered Mode x OK K K K K K K K K e K K 3 X Note Number True Voice 0 127 DE SE SE SE EE Se Sy 0 127 0 127 Sequencer and Arpeggiator data can transmit all note numbers 0 127 Note On Not
47. AC outlet p 12 5 AUDIO OUTPUT Connect these outputs to the input jacks of your amp or mixer In addition to the L MONO and R main ste reo audio outputs TR provides two individual audio outputs The sound from each oscillator drum tim bre track or insertion effect can be freely routed to any output r p 112 MAIN L MONO R These are unbalanced phone jacks rs p 12 These are the main audio output jacks By setting Bus Select to L R the output from an oscillator an inser tion effect an individual drum part or the metronome can be output to the MAIN L MONO and R jacks When making connections in stereo use L MONO and R When making connections in mono use the L MONO jack IN DIVIDUAL 1 2 These are unbalanced phone jacks p 12 These are individual independent audio output jacks By cycling the Bus Select through 1 2 1 2 an oscilla tor an insertion effect an individual drum part or the metronome etc can be assigned to be output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 2 jacks The output from the 1 2 jacks is not affected by the VOLUME slider 6 Pedal connections ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack The separately sold Korg XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal or EXP 2 foot controller options can be connected to this jack p 13 Its function can be assigned in Global mode allowing you to use the pedal to control the volume etc p 117 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack A separately sold on off foot switch such as
48. By combining key zones specified for each timbre you can create layered or split combinations The upper and lower limits for the key zone of each timbre are set by the Top Key and Bottom Key respectively For example in the following diagram timbres 1 3 are set to create a layered and split combination This is specified by the key zone settings Timbres 2 and 3 create a layer Timbre 1 and timbres 2 3 are split between the B3 and C4 note numbers Timbre 3 Strings Timbre 2 Brass Timbre 1 P _ Piano _ CH B3 C4 G9 As an example here we will explain how to create a combination like the one shown above D In the 1 1 Play Prog page or the 2 1 Ed Prog Mix Prog page use the Program Select area to select the program that will be used for each timbre 1 3 Select a piano program for timbre 1 Select a brass program for timbre 2 Select a strings program for timbre 3 In the MIDI page of 3 1 Ed Param1 set Status to INT for all the timbres that you wish to use and set MIDI Channel to either Gch or to match the global MIDI channel a G will be displayed after the channel number In the Key page of 3 3 Edit Key Zone set Top Key and Bottom Key Set timbre 1 to a Top Key of G9 and a Bottom Key of C4 Set timbres 2 and 3 to a Top Key of B3 and a Bot tom Key of C 1 m You can also enter these values by holding down the E
49. F2 E Edit key The Perform Edit page will appear 000 Big Sweep Stab Performance Editor ETE Octave Stretch OSC Ea Level Attack Decay IFX Bal MFH Bal Te edit JL arp E Select the Program Use the Performance Editor to adjust the sound PG p 3 Use the cursor keys a a v gt to select the desired performance editor slider and use the VALUE controller to adjust the setting noe If you want to reset the value press numeric key 0 and then press the ENTER key to restore the previous setting Octave Indicates the octave setting Pitch Stretch Simultaneously adjusts the transpose and tune settings of the oscillator This allows you to produce a variety of tonal changes without losing the character of the original sound fs This is particularly effective for acoustic type pro grams such as guitar bass or piano Select various programs and try this out OSC Balance Adjusts the level balance between oscillators 1 and 2 A For programs whose Mode Oscillator Mode PROG 2 1 Ed Basic Prog Basic page setting is Single oscillator 2 will not sound Only the level of oscillator 1 will change For a Drums program this performance editor will have no effect Amp Level Indicates the amp level This will adjust the volume of the entire program Attack Time Indicates the attack time of the filter EG and amp EG This will adjust the speed of the attack from note on A In order
50. Filter LIyp8 eesoaeeneaeses 53 Foot pedales 26 Foot switch sss 9 13 Force OSC Mode 59 BEorm t 5t 100 122 Front panel eee 5 Function button 10 G H HI Hyper Integrated 1 High Multisample Low Multisample 50 High pass filter 53 127 TEX Balance sees 32 Index 36 37 86 88 91 92 93 94 INDIVIDUAL 1 2 9 Input setting sss 39 Insert effect 55 61 112 Combination Sequencer 114 Program sueneecteee 113 Sampling 89 114 J Joystick eee 5 24 K Key Syne e eterne 29 104 Key Zone sss 57 60 Keyboard amp Index 93 Keyboard crossfade 58 Keyboard input 17 Keyboard Track 53 54 KMP file 102 KSC file 102 L Lay6E citet tex 58 60 LCD screen 6 10 120 LCD screen messages when separately sold options are installed 18 Level AUDIO INPUT 115 Progtamxcoeesceseeee 54 Level meter sesssss 39 LEQ dii eut 52 55 Link iter 86 Combination ss 106 Program sse 105 Load D t sisusiestsensstende 101 Demo data sssssssss 19 Preload data
51. Filter1 4 4 Ed MIDI Filter4 For each MIDI Filter item you can specify whether or not the corresponding MIDI message will be transmit ted and received The checked items will be transmit ted and received A MIDI filter does not turn the function itself on off but specifies whether or not that MIDI message will be transmitted and received For example if portamento is on portamento will be applied to the sound of this instrument even if Portamento SW CC 65 is unchecked For example if you selected a bass program for timbre 1 and a piano program for timbre 2 to create a split type combination you could make the following set tings so that pressing the connected damper pedal would apply the damper effect only to the piano pro gram of timbre 2 Set Damper CC 64 in 4 1 Ed MIDI Filter1 MIDI 1 2 page Timbre 1 Damper CC 64 unchecked Timbre 2 Damper CC 64 checked COMBI 4 1 Ed HMIDI Filter 1 2 Damper CC amp 6 trin Fiji AF Damper i o O portants s C865 E m Qi i i NS A oni Ui Arpeggiator settings 6 1 Ed Arp Indicates settings for the arpeggiator r p 105 Bus settings 7 1 Ed InsertFX BUS Specifies the routing for each timbre i e how it is sent to the insert effect master effects and individual out puts p 114 Insert Effect settings 7 1 Ed InsertFX Setup IFX Indicates insert effect and make settings for them e p 114
52. GLOBAL 1 1 System Foot page Foot Pedal Assign p 117 Using the arpeggiator while you play The arpeggiator is a function that automatically gener ates arpeggios broken chords Most arpeggiators pro duce an arpeggio when you play a chord on the keyboard The chord you played on the keyboard is sounded as an arpeggio broken chord In addition to this the TR s arpeggiator is a polyphonic arpeggiator that is able to produce a variety of chordal transformations or phrases based on the pitch or tim ing of the notes you play on the keyboard These func tions let you use the arpeggiator to play a wide range of patterns including drum or bass phrases and guitar or keyboard backing riffs It is also effective to use the arpeggiator as part of the sound creating process when creating subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects In addition the TR features a Dual Arpeggiator that lets you simultaneously use two arpeggio patterns in Combination mode and Sequencer mode You can take advantage of this in many ways such as applying sep arate arpeggio patterns to a drums program and a bass program or using keyboard split or velocity to switch between two arpeggio patterns The TR provides five preset arpeggio patterns the standard UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RANDOM and lets you program and store 216 user arpeggio pat terns With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of prelo
53. If the recorded performance is not reproduced by the playback check the following conditions SEQ 6 1 Arp Setup page Arpeggiator Run A B and Assign settings T TERCK 61 Tei i i tuo e Moel osca Nose de lten ana VINIEI If Arpeggiator Run A and B are checked and the arpeggiator is assigned to a track make sure that MIDI Channel is set to other than 01 E Make sure that the global MIDI channel GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 Arpeggiator Run MIDI Channel Correction If either A or B 01 only are checked Correction required 01 02 01 03 etc No correction required If both A and B 01 only are checked Correction required 01 02 01 08 etc Correction required for only one 01 02 03 etc No correction required Correction required 2 l Tf the MIDI Channel of multiple tracks operated by the arpeggiator is set only to 01 refer to the lines for 01 only If the MIDI Channel settings are 01 and one other chan nel such as 01 and 02 or 01 and 03 then refer to the lines for 01 02 01 03 etc If the MIDI Channel settings are 01 and multiple other MIDI channels such as 01 and 02 and 03 then refer to the line for 01 02 03 etc 2 Correction is necessary only if the tracks operated by a sin gle arpeggiator are using only MIDI Channel 01 In some cases correction may also be neces
54. KSC aes Press the F5 Name key to access the text dia log box assign a filename of SMPL_DM1 and press the F8 OK key Make sure that All is selected for the To field and press the F8 OK key to save the data When saving is completed a file with an extension of KSC together with KMP and KSF files in folders will be saved For details on each file refer to PG p 147 About Korg format PCM data files Converting a multisample into a program A multisample you created can be converted into a program By converting the data into a program a sample or multisample you created in Sampling mode can be used in Program mode Combination mode or Sequencer mode Create a multisample p 36 2 Press the F1 Sample key to access the SMPL 1 1 Recording Sample page 3 Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the utility menu Press the F7 key to select Conv To Prog and press the F8 OK key The following dialog box will appear Convert Multisample 001 Stereo Name SMPL Demo LiUse Destination Program Parameters To D127 InitlProgramD127 In the To field select the program into which the data will be converted Bank D127 is initialized programs We recommend you select this program A When you execute the Convert operation the pro gram in the conversion destination location will be overwritten and replaced by t
55. Setup Master Effect 1 10 HHE Rtn 06d i 2D 49 LCR BPM Delay Rtn 665 Low Mid High setup e MERE UEEQ UIN In Master Effect 1 and Master Effect 2 select the type of each master effect The procedure is the same as for the insert effect step amp The input output of the master effect is mono on stereo out Even if you select a stereo input type effect the input will be monaural Basic fundions In On Off switch each master effect on off If this is Off the output of the master effect will be muted Specify the routing of master effects 1 and 2 For details on the routing settings refer to PG p 163 In Rtn Return 1 2 adjust the output level of each master effect Effects settings A For each effect the W value of W D Wet Dry is the effect output level This is multiplied by the return value Rtn 127 is x1 0 to determine the actual master effect output level Move to the MFX1 or MFX2 page and set the parameters of the effect that you selected as the master effect For details on the parameters of each effect refer to PG p 168 Master EQ Use the stereo 3 band master EQ to make final equalizing adjustments immediately before the sound is output from the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks Master EQ settings can be made in Master EQ Gain dB of the PROG 7 2 Ed MasterFX Setup page or in the Master EQ page For details on master EQ pa
56. TIMBRE 8 PROGRAM SEQUENCER PROGRAM Insert Master Effect Co Cue ITRACK 1 PROGRAM TRACK 9 ITRACK 2 PROGRAM TRACK 10 PROGRAM TRACK 3 oc TRACK 11 Poo ITRACK 4 program TRACK 12 PROGRA ITRACK 5 PROGRAM TRACK 13 PROGRAM ITRACK 6 PROGRAM TRACK 14 pROGRAI Arpeggiator A TRACK 7 PROGRAM TRACK 15 PROGRAM Arpeggiatpr B TRACK 8 PROGRAM TRACK 16 PROGRAM ew Create and playback patterns in realtime using the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function Global mode Make settings that affect the entire TR such as master tune and global MIDI channel Create drum kits 24 kits user arpeggio patterns 216 patterns and user scales 16 one octave scales and 1 all note scale Create drum kits using the 518 internal drum samples ROM EX You can also use samples RAM that were created in Sampling mode requires the separately sold EXB SMPL option e Set the function of the assignable pedals and assignable switches Transmit data dumps of MIDI exclusive data Adjust the input level from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 if the EXB SMPL option is installed This setting is valid outside of Sampling mode The internal effects can be applied to the external input sound The settings for Sampling mode are made independently in Sampling mode itself Media mode Data of each mode can be saved and loaded using the SD card
57. The Setup page displays the state of the routing and insert effect settings BUS Select settings can also be made in this page Use the cursor keys a 4 v gt to select the timbre and use the INC DEC keys to make the setting In this example IFX is used by 1 timbre 1 and 2 tim bre 2 In the same way as for a program you can select the insert effect turn it on off and set the Pan CC 8 BUS Select S1 Send 1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 parameters that follow the insert effect p 113 114 Master effects Master EQ These settings are made in the same way as for pro grams p 113 Effect settings in Sampling mode requires the EXB SMPL option In Sampling mode insert effect can be applied to an external audio source connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks and sampled Routing D Select the SMPL 1 1 Recording Input Pref page The parameters in Input1 and Input2 specify the insert effect to which the external audio input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks will be sent For details on these settings refer to Sampling e p 35 Insert effect Select the effect that will be used by the insert effect and set the Pan CC 8 p 113 Master effects Master EQ The master effects and master EQ cannot be used in Sampling mode Effect settings for the AUDIO IN PUT requires the EXB SMPL option Even in modes other than Sampling mode the TR s effects can be a
58. Wood E Guita ic functions settings c A Arpeggi Set J Temp to specify the tempo This is the same as for a program p 103 How ever the tempo is shared by both arpeggiators A and B Make Assign settings Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres Each timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that has been assigned to it Make Arpeggiator Run settings Check the arpeggiator s that you want to operate The arpeggiator s checked here will run when the ARP ON OFF key is turned on With the settings shown in the LCD screen for steps and 3 turning the ARP ON OFF key on will cause arpeggiator A to operate for timbres 1 and 2 and arpeggiator B to operate for timbre 3 When the ARP ON OFF key is turned off timbres 1 4 will sound as a layer If all timbres Assign are Off or if neither Arpeg giator Run A or B is checked the arpeggiator will not function 2 In the Arp A and Arp B pages set the parameters for arpeggiators A and B The parameters for A and B are the same as for a program rp 103 In the Scan Zone page specify the range in which arpeggiators A and B will operate The parameters for A and B are the same as for a program rp 103 105 You can use keyboard ranges or playing velocity to operate the arpeggiator or to switch between arpeg giators A and B By using the COMBI 3 3 Ed Key Zone Key page and COMBI 3 4 Ed Vel Zone Vel
59. amp e mixer or headphones ssssssss p 12 e Ifyou are in Combination Sequencer and master s your amp or mixer turned on s Local Control turned on In GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI check the Local Control effects are not applied when you raise the S1 Send1 MFX1 or S2 Send2 MFX2 of the timbre track does Return 1 or Return 2 from the master effect need to be raised M P PG p 47 86 On check box sette PG p 130 ebur prse cad P Alternatively has Send 1 or Send 2 for each s the VOLUME slider raised ep 5 oscillator of the program used by the timbre track been lowered sss ve PG p 45 84 121 Troubleshooting noe The actual send level is determined by multiplying the send setting of each oscillator in the program with the send setting of the timbre track When you loaded data a combination or song does not sound correctly e In the dialog box from which you saved the data did you check the check boxes for each item that you wanted to save sss p 46 In the dialog box when saving the data did you check the check boxes for each item that you wanted to save Are the bank number of the programs used by the song the same as when the song was created Playback does not start when you press the START STO P key in Sequencer mode e Is the GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI page MIDI Clo
60. before loading the above data from SD card or via MIDI data dump or before recording in Sequencer mode D Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode the key will light and press the EXIT key to select 1 1 System 2 Press the F2 Pref key to access the 1 1 Sys tem Preferences page GLOBAL 1 1 Sustem Preference Proaram iMemory Protect System Preference Bank Map GM Power On Mode Reset i C Drum Kit iD Combi Arp UsrPat Osong LCD Contrast 28 Joroot o OG Uncheck the appropriate Memory Protect check box for the data that you wish to write into inter nal memory Writing a program or combination The programs or combinations that you create by using the Performance Editor or by editing parameters in the various edit Ed pages can be saved in the inter nal memory of the this instrument This action is referred to as writing a program or writing a combi nation If you want your edited data to be preserved after the power is turned off you must write it There are two ways to write a program or combination A Before you write data into memory you must turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode Memory protect A A combination does not contain the actual pro gram data for each timbre but simply remembers the number of the program used by each timbre If you edit a program that is used by a combination or exchange it with a different program number the sound
61. commands Other function buttons examples Sequencer mode EDIT DONE INSERT CUT COPY JUMP DONE Tie Rest Back Done used in Cue List Event Edit Step Recording REVERT copy and paste RPPR settings Global mode TEXT KEY Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed INSERT CUT COPY CREATE create multisample L R ZOOM Utility menu In each page you can press the UTILITY func tion button the F8 key to access the utility menu The utility menu contains commands that can be used in that page The utility menu that appears will differ depending on the page that is selected You can also select up to ten utility menu com mands by holding down the ENTER key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 Press the EXIT key to close the utility menu For Lg press the F7 key to select the desired utility menu command You can also use the cur sor keys a 4 v gt to make your selection For LIKA press the F8 key to open the dialog box of the selected utility menu command This key also switches the status of commands that you check or uncheck Dialog boxes When you select a utility menu command etc a dialog box will open Use the cursor keys a 4 v gt to select parameters Use the VALUE controllers p 16 to input the parameter values When selecting pro gram or combination numbers in a dialog box you can use the BANK A GM keys in addition
62. control changes and arpeggiator etc while you perform rp 25 27 SELECT key This key switches the realtime controller between A mode B mode and C mode The LED of the selected mode will light ARP ON OFF key This key turns the arpeggiator on off When on the key will light 1 2 3 4 knob A mode 1 LPF CUTO FF Controls the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter 2 RESO N AN CE HPF Controls the filter resonance level or the high pass filter cutoff frequency 3 EG IN TEN SITY Controls the filter EG intensity 4 EG RELEASE Controls the filter amp release time B mode 1 ASSIGNABLE 1 2 ASSIGNABLE 2 3 ASSIGNABLE 3 4 ASSIGNABLE 4 Controls the functions that are assigned in each mode Program Combination Sequencer or Sampling if the EXB SMPL option is installed C mode 1 not used 2 ARP GATE Controls the gate time note duration of the arpeggi ated notes At the center position 12 o clock the set ting of the arpeggiator Gate parameter will be used Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the time and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the time 3 ARP VELOCITY Controls the velocity playing strength of the arpeggi ated notes At the center position 12 o clock the set ting of the arpeggiator Velocity parameter will be used Rotating the knob toward the left will weaken the velocity and rotating it towar
63. copying preset patterns drum phrases D Turn off the power Then turn it on again amp When you turn off the power all songs will be erased Be sure to save any important data before you perform this step n This explanation assumes that you are starting from the default state immediately after power on 2 Press the SEO key to enter Sequencer mode 001 HEN 000 Meter d 4 Reso Hi 000 NEW SONG FE 120 Manu CORPPR T81 TRACK 61 T81 _ADND Eig Sweep Stab choi Play REC Prog 2l proa tell Mis g misas JL Prec T DUTEA Load a template song Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the Utility menu and then use the F7 key or the cursor keys to select Load Template Song and press the F8 OK Key A dialog box will appear Load Template Song P13 Rcid Jazz From ViCopy Pattern to Track too Make sure that the template song name at the right of From is highlighted and use the VALUE con troller to select P13 Acid Jazz fp There are 16 template songs each containing pro gram pan volume and effect settings suitable for various styles of music By loading a template into a song you can begin recording immediately with out having to make the same frequently used set tings each time If you want to specify the program and volume etc yourself from scratch refer to Making track settings for a new song p 70 Use the cursor keys to move to Copy Pattern to Track
64. device Programs combinations global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns Songs cue lists About preloaded data and preset data Preloaded data is the data that is loaded into memory at the factory This data can be rewritten and is written into the various locations listed in the preceding sec tion Writing to internal memory This data is main tained inside the TR and can be reloaded using the Load Preload Demo Songs command r p 48 Program banks A D 000 127 Combination banks A C 000 127 User drum kits 00 INT 15 INT User arpeggio patterns 000 INT 199 INT Demo songs 000 001 Preset data is data that cannot be rewritten by the Write operation This includes the following data Program banks G 001 128 g d 001 128 Preset drum kits 64 GM 72 GM Preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 Preset template songs P00 P15 Preset patterns P000 P149 Program audition riffs 000 383 Writing to internal memory Memory protect To prevent programs combinations songs user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns from being overwrit ten accidentally the TR provides a Memory Protect set ting that prohibits writing to memory Before you save edited data or load data from SD card or other external media if the EXB SMPL option is installed use the following procedure to turn off memory protect uncheck the appropriate check box You must also turn memory protect off
65. drum kit PG p 26 160 3 Use Pan to specify the stereo output position The setting you make here is valid if the Use DKit Setting is checked PROG 5 1 Ed Ampl Level Pan page for the program that uses this drum kit Use S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 to set the send levels to the master effects The settings you make here are valid if the Use DKit Setting is checked PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFX BUS page for the program that uses this drum kit 5 Use the Utility Write Drum Kits to save the data If you wish to change the name of the drum kit before you save it use the Utility Rename Drum Kit p 44 If you turn off the power before writing the data into memory your edits will be lost p 45 Mem ory in Global mode ic functions Global mode Media mode How Media mode is organized In Media mode you can use an SD card or a connected external SCSI device if the separately sold EXB SMPL is installed to save or load various types of data You can also make settings related to saving and loading functionality For details on connecting an external SCSI device and setting the SCSI ID refer to refer to the manual included with the EXB SMPL Media that can be used SD card amp The SD card is not included It must be purchased separately The TR supports SD cards with a power supply volt age of 2 7 3 6V and capacities of 16 MB 1 GB and SD card with ID External SCSI storag
66. drum kit or a GM drum kit amp GM drum kits 24 GM 32 GM cannot be selected here It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum kit If you wish to modify the settings of one of the drum kits 24 GM 32 GM you can use Copy Drum Kit to copy it to 00 INT 23 User and then edit the copy 4 Use Key to select the note number that you wish to edit The drum sample parameters for the selected note number will be displayed in the High Sample Low Sample and Voice Mix pages In addition to using the VALUE controllers you can also use the follow ing methods to select the note number Hold down the ENTER key and play a key on the keyboard to input that note number Use the F6 Key and F7 Key keys to increment or decrement the note numbers Use Assign to specify whether a drum sample will be assigned to the note number If this is checked a drum sample will be assigned to that note number Normally you will check this If this is not checked no drum sample will be assigned to that note number That note number will sound the drum sample assigned at its right but a semitone lower Use this setting when you want only to change the pitch such as with tom or cymbal sounds 6 Use Drumsample Bank and Drumsample to select the drum sample that will be assigned to the note number Set the High Drumsample in the High Sample page and the Low Drumsample in the Low Sample page
67. during playback For example you might record one sample per octave and assign each of these samples to an index keyboard area All of the instru mental sounds in the TR s internal preset multisamples are constructed in this way By assigning multiple samples such as phrase samples or rhythm loops to a multisample and arranging them across the keyboard you can play multiple samples simultaneously Since a different phrase could be assigned to each key you can perform just as though you were using a pad type sampler Alternatively these samples could be assigned at one octave inter vals and played as phrase variations with different playback pitches The TR can hold a maximum of 1 000 multisamples in its internal memory A multisample can be selected as the oscillator for a program and played as a program In a combination they can be combined with preset programs and used in a multi They can be used with the arpeggiator to produce interesting results for example by using the arpeggiator to automatically play sound effects or spo ken samples Index002 Top Key Index001 Top Key Index003 Top Key Index004 Top Key Index 001 0000 Sample AJ Index 002 0001 Sample BJ Index 003 Index 004 0002 0003 Sample C Sample DJ Program OSC Single Double C Sample DrumkKit Program OSC Drums Sampling m The multisample and sample dat
68. each combination and in Sequencer mode for each song the entire mode pe 3 OUTPUT Timbre 1 Track 1 gt Insert Effect Master EQ L MONO R Timbre 2 Track 2 Timbre 8 Track 16 In Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed the sound of an external source that is input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 can be pro cessed by the insert effect as the sound is sampled Sampling mode settings are made by the Input 1 and Input 2 parameters of the SMPL 1 1 Recording Input Pref page The settings here are valid only within Sampling mode 112 Routing settings and effect set tings The insert effect master effects and master EQ that can be used in each mode are structured identically However you can change the routing to specify how the oscillator s of a program the timbres of a combi nation or the tracks of a song will be sent to the insert effect or master effects In the pages that follow we will explain how you can make routing settings and effect settings in each mode Effect settings for a program Routing Select the PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFX BUS page PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFX BUS BUS Select BUS Select BUS Select CAN OSCs g PIE ed ogiz S Set BUS Select All OSCs to specify where the oscillator output will be sent L R The output will not be sent to the insert effect After passing through the master EQ the
69. following use Power off the TR and wait for the card to cool before removing it e SD cards are precision parts Do not bend them drop them or subject them to physical shock Avoid using or storing SD cards in locations of extremely high or low temperature such as in direct sunlight a closed automobile or near a heater or in locations of high humidity or excessive dust Avoid using or storing SD cards in locations where they may be subject to strong static electricity or electrical noise Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to adhere to the contacts of an SD card If the contacts should become soiled gently wipe them off using a dry cloth When you are not using an SD card keep it in the protective case that was included with the card to prevent it from being damaged by static electricity Do notleave an SD card where it is accessible by infants or children who might place it in their mouth and swallow it Carefully read and observe the owner s manual included with your SD card About the write protect setting of an SD card SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the data from being overwritten accidentally and lost If you set the card s switch to the protected setting it will be impossible to write or erase data on the card or to format it If you need to save edited data on the card move the switch back to its original unprotected set ting N i Protected
70. from the PCG file programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns global settings If internal memory contains data that you want to keep use Save All or Save PCG to save it before you load other data In the Utility menu select Load Selected A dialog box will appear The display and opera tions will differ depending on the type of file that is to be loaded For details on each type of file refer to PG p 143 If you execute the Load operation with Load 4 4 2 SNG too checked the SNG file will be loaded at the same time as the PCG file If you execute the Load operation with Load eee KSC too checked the KSC file will be loaded at the same time as the PCG file Load NEWFILE PCG Load NEWFILE SNG too LJLoad NEWFILE KSC PHL LSS too Press the F8 OK key to execute the Load oper ation A Loading will be halted if the specified data is not found in the file PG p 143 amp Never remove the media while the data is being loaded 102 Saving data For the procedure of saving data to an SD card or to external SCSI media refer to Saving on external media rs p 46 Types of data that can be saved The following types of data can be saved on external media SD card etc If the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed data can also be saved on high capacity media such as a hard disk PCG files Programs combination
71. manually set any of the sequencer parameters As an example here s how to use the Auto Song Setup function in Combination mode D Enter Combination mode COMBI 1 1 Pla Combination Combi Select Category aa Keuboard 000 Amp Driven Wurly 2 In the COMBI 1 1 Play Prog page select the desired combination You can use the COMBI 1 1 Play Mix page to edit the pan and volume of each timbre and the COMBI 1 1 Play Arp A Arp B page to edit the arpeggiator settings When you are finished editing execute Update Combination or Write Combination if you want to save your edits note This operation will use the settings that are stored with the current Program or Combination So if you want to use the arpeggiator when you record you will need to save the Program or Combination with the arpeggiator function switched on before you proceed ic functions mode 77 78 3 Hold down the ENTER key and press the REC WRITE key The Setup to Record dialog box will appear Setup to Record fire you sure Press the F8 OK key to execute Auto Song Setup or press the F7 Cancel key if you decide not to execute When you execute Auto Song Setup the TR will automatically enter the Sequencer mode and the settings of the previously selected program or com bination will be applied to the song The first unused song will be selected as the song Combination settings that are automaticall
72. mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed cannot be saved in internal memory by the Write operation LA If the EXB SMPL sold separately option is installed and you are using RAM bank multisam ples or samples as the Multisample or Drum Kit of a program it is not possible to write this multi sample or sample data i e to save it perma nently This means that the sound of a program or combination that uses RAM bank multisamples or samples will not be reproduced the next time the power is turned on In order to reproduce these sounds the saved multisamples and samples must be loaded from external media e g SD card Saving to external media SD card etc The following data can be saved on external media SD card etc If the EXB SMPL option is installed this data can also be saved on high capacity media such as a SCSI hard disk etc For details on the file format refer to PG p 141 Programs combinations global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns Song and cue lists Standard MIDI Files SMF Sequencer mode songs can be saved as SMF data e System exclusive data System exclusive data received by the TR from an external MIDI device The TR can function as a data filer Multisamples and sample data created in Sampling mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed MIDI data dump The following types of data can be transmitted as a MIDI data dump and saved on an external data filer or other
73. notes in the arpeggio If this is set to Key the velocity with which you actually played the note will be used If a user arpeggio pattern is selected you can set this to Step In this case the value of the Vel setting for each step GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Edit page will be used This value will be in effect when the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode ARP VELOCITY knob is in the center position 12 o clock Be sure that the knob is in the center position when you make this setting noe When a preload user arpeggio pattern is selected 104 setting the Gate or Velocity to Step will add a sense of groove to the arpeggio pattern Swing This adjusts the timing of the even num bered notes in the arpeggio counting from the first note to give the pattern a sense of swing Sort If this is checked the arpeggio will be sounded in order of pitch regardless of the order in which notes were played on keyboard On If this is unchecked the arpeggio will be sounded in the order in which the notes were played on key board Off ON UP La Latch If this is checked the arpeggio will con tinue playing even after you take your hand off the keyboard If this is unchecked the arpeggio will stop playing when you take your hand off the key board Key Sync If this is checked the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning when you play a note after ha
74. oct LPF HPF Alternate modulation function Filters Waveform memory 64 Mbyte PCM ROM 470 multisamples 518 drumsamples If the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed Sample data RAM SIMM 16 Mbyte included with the EXB SMPL expandable up to 64 Mbyte Effect section 1 insert effect stereo in out 2 master effects mono in stereo out 1 master EQ 3 band stereo all usable simultaneously 89 effect types available for insert effects or master effects Effect dynamic modulation function Combinations Programs 384 user memory combinations 384 preloads 512 user memory programs 512 preloads 128 9 drum ROM programs GM sound map compat ible 383 audition riffs Drum Kits 24 user drum kits 16 preloads 9 ROM GM drum kits GM2 sound map compatible Dual polyphonic arpeggiator Use two arpeggiators simultaneously Combination Sequencer modes 5 preset arpeggio patterns 216 user arpeggio patterns 216 preloads Sequencer 16 timbres 16 tracks 1 master track Maximum capacity 200 000 notes Resolution J 192 200 songs 20 cue lists 150 preset patterns 100 user patterns for each song 16 preset 16 user template songs Supports TR format and SMF formats 0 and 1 124 RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function One set is available for each one song Media mode Load save utility Data filter function save load MIDI exclusive data Loading from CD ROM ISO 9660 level1 is
75. on the keyboard making the sound brighter When set to a negative value the cutoff frequency will fall as you play higher on the keyboard making the sound darker Int to A and to B adjust the effect that keyboard tracking will have on filters A and B PG p 14 Program mode Filter EG Mod 1 page Adjusts the effect produced by the filter EG whose set tings are made in the EG page Use the Int to A and to B settings to specify the depth of the filter EG Use the Vel to A and to B settings to specify the effect of velocity on the filter EG e AMS and Int to A B adjust the effect that AMS will have on the filter EG depth These three settings will determine the depth of the tonal change produced by the filter EG Filter Modulation Mod 2 page Set this when you wish to produce tonal change by using controllers etc to vary the cutoff frequency IfoMod LFO Mod page Indicates settings that allow the LFO to produce cyclic changes in tone a wah effect 53 54 Intensity to A LFO1 Int to A and to B LFOI Int to B specify by how much the LFO will change the tone JS Y Int to A and to B specify the depth of the wah effect that will be produced by the LFO when the joystick of this instrument is moved toward yourself or when CC 2 is received Int to A and Int to B specify the depth of the wah effect that will be produced by the LFO when AMS Alternat
76. or live performance HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system The HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system is a PCM tone generator system with full digital signal process ing that guarantees pristine sound and features enor mous flexibility in musical extensibility modulation and effect routing Tone generator section 64 MB of preset PCM ROM containing 470 multisamples and 518 drumsamples The sampling frequency is 48 kHz and the maximum polyphony is 62 voices Filter synthesis section 24 dB oct Low Pass Resonance type or 12 dB oct Low Pass amp High Pass type filters can be used A wide variety of filter effects can be achieved from active sounds with aggressive resonance to subtle tones using a high pass filter A broad range of editing parameters gives you control over every aspect of the sound One insert effect stereo in stereo out two master effects mono in stereo out and a three band master EQ stereo in stereo out can all be used simultaneously You can select from 89 types of effect algorithms and edit them Overview Highly flexible effect routing is possible Effects can also be routed freely to the individual outputs Alternate Modulation and Effect Dynamic Modula tio n The synthesis section filter etc provides Alternate Modulation functionality and the effect section provides Effect Dynamic Modulation functionality This allows you to freely apply modulation to parameters that
77. page to set keyboard ranges and velocity ranges in conjunction with each other you can create even more variations 8 If you wish to save the edited combination set tings in internal memory turn off memory protect in Global mode and write the combination v p 43 The Status MIDI Channel and Assign set tings shown in the LCD screen of steps 2 and 3 can be made so that certain timbres will sound only when the arpeggiator is On and will be silent when the arpeggiator is not Off Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing technique we will describe the settings of one of the preset combinations as an example Combination A021 Urban Nature RnB Select combination A021 Urban Nature RnB and play it Before you play make sure that the global MIDI chan nel GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 Arpeggiator A is assigned to T timbre 4 and 8 When you play the keyboard the arpeggio pattern U144 INT Dr Nature RnB will sound only the T4 program B004 Trance GarageKit The arpeggio pattern uses the Fixed Note setting which is appropriate when playing a drum arpeggio Fixed Note is checked in GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Setup page With this setting the arpeggio pattern will always play the specified pitches regardless of the note numbers received from the keyboard x PG p 138 The A Key Btm and Key Top COMBI 6 1 Ed Arp Scan Zone page are set so that arpeggiator A wil
78. panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack The function that will be controlled by the foot switch and the polarity of the foot switch can be set in GLO BAL 1 1 3 System Foot page Foot SW Assign and Foot SW Polarity p 117 PG p 127 226 Damper pedal connections Allows you to sustain the sound while playing Connect a Korg DS 1H damper pedal separately sold option to the rear panel DAMPER jack If a DS 1H is connected you can produce half damper effects The polarity of the damper pedal can be set in GLO BAL 1 1 3 System Foot page Damper Polarity and its sensitivity can be adjusted by the GLOBAL 1 1 1 System utility menu command Half Damper Calibra tion PG p 126 128 Connections to MIDI equipment 5 computers 1 Connections to MIDI equipment The keyboard controllers and sequencer etc of TR can be used to control an external MIDI tone generator Conversely another MIDI keyboard or sequencer can control the tone generator of TR to produce sound Q Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI connectors of TR with the MIDI connectors of your external device ve PG p 233 MIDI applications Connecting MIDI devices computers amp f MIDI data is being transmitted from the TR via USB to your computer transmission from the MIDI OUT connector is halted 2 Connections to a computer Your performance on the TR as well as controller and sequencer data can be sent to a computer and the tone generator of t
79. should also select multi track recording if you cre ated the RPPR data using multiple tracks rather than just a single track and want to simultaneously record the performance of multiple tracks nole The RPPR pattern will be recorded as performance data on the tracks used by the pattern Here we will explain how you can simultaneously record a performance that uses both RPPR and the arpeggiator D For each RPPR pattern set Sync to SEQ With a setting of SEO patterns played by the RPPR function while the sequencer is playing or recording will start in synchronization with the measures of the sequencer Pat Pre P121 HipHop 1 HipHop Track T61 Drums Essen E 2 r 2 We will use the arpeggiator to play the bass pat tern Follow these settings Set Track Select to T02 Bass Select the SEQ 6 1 Arp Setup page and set the track 2 Assign to A Make sure that A is checked for Arpeggiator Run Select the SEQ 6 1 Arp Arp A page and set Pat tern to U099 INT Pattern Tier BS Octave 1 Gate 630 Velocity Key Swing 860 TTY Oey Sunc OkKeyboard resort OLatch Reso F Do not check Key Sync Press the ARP ON OFF key The key will light In the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page check the Multi REC check box FoPo GET KS KENN 3 ret 7155 If Recording Mode is set to Loop All Tracks it will not be possible to select Multi REC Set the
80. supported if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed Combinations programs drum kits user arpeggio patterns PCG created on the TRITON TRITONpro TRITONproX or the TRITON Rack can be convert loaded Songs SNG created on the TRITON TRITONpro TRITONproX can be convert loaded Sampling if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed 48 kHz 16 bit linear Maximum sample data memory capacity 64 Mbyte with SIMM expansion 4000 samples 1000 multisamples 128 indexes for each multisample Time Slice Time Stretch and various other editing functions Able to load AIFF WAVE AKAI S1000 3000 Korg format sample data can be loaded Sample data can be exported in AIFF or WAVE formats Keyboard 61 key 76 key synth action velocity amp aftertouch 88 key Weighted velocity amp aftertouch Controllers Joystick SW1 SW2 keys REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 and SELECT key ARP ON OFF key User interface Graphical user interface 240 x 64 pixel LCD display Mode keys COMBI PROG SEQ GLOBAL MEDIA SAMPLING Value controllers VALUE dial INC DEC keys numeric keys 0 9 HOLD Cursor keys a lt gt gt MENU PAGE keys EXIT key ENTER key COMPARE key F1 F8 T1 T9 T8 T16 key TIMBRE TRACK key BANK keys PROG BANK A B C D GM COMBI BANK A B C SEQUENCER control keys PAUSE REW F
81. switched on off by SW1 or SW2 key OS1lfo OSC1 LFO page PROG 3 1 Ed Pitch OSC1 LFO LFO1 Intensity Pitch LFO1 2 Modulation 06 06 i AMS AfterT LFO2 Intensity 66 66 JS Int 488 08 LFO 1 2 An LFO can be used to cyclically modulate the pitch the vibrato effect Intensity LFO Intensity sets the depth to which the LFO specified in 5 3 Ed LFOs will affect the pitch With a setting of 12 00 vibrato will produce a maxi mum of 1 octave of pitch change JS Y Int specifies the amount of vibrato that the LFO will produce when the joystick is pushed away from yourself Intensity AMS Intensity specifies the depth of vibrato that will be applied by the LFO when AMS Alternate Modulation Source is operated For exam ple if AMS LFO1 AMS is set to AfterT and you set an appropriate value for Intensity AMS Intensity vibrato will be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard or when MIDI aftertouch messages are received EG Pitch EG page Here you can make settings for the pitch EG When you wish to create sound effects etc set the pitch EG to make major changes in pitch over time To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a brass or vocal sound you can use the EG to create a subtle change in pitch at the attack PG p 10 EG and LFO By using an EG envelope generator to apply time varying change or
82. ten s place of the program number as you select programs D Press the HOLD key to make the display indi cate 107s HOLD The ten s place of the program number will be held fixed Category 16 FastSynth Sweep Stab Obie KModi Hnob3E RMods ZE HMedz HnobdE KM 2 By pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can input the one s place in a single action You can use the INC DEC keys to change the ten s place 4 To cancel the 10 s HOLD function press gHOLD to erase the display Using a connected switch to select programs A separately sold on off type switch such as the sepa rately sold Korg PS 1 can be connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH connector and assigned a program select function p 117 Selecting programs from a MIDI device MIDI program change messages can be transmitted from an external MIDI device and received by this instrument to select programs r PG p 234 Selecting and playing a combination In Combination mode you can select and play a combi nation from banks A C Select various combinations and hear how they sound Selecting a combination D Press the COMBI key the key will light You will enter Combination mode Make sure that the upper line of the LCD screen indicates COMBI 1 1 Play COMBI 1 1 Pla Category 00 Keyboard Combination m Bank B Bank 000 Amp D Combi Select Category Selecting a combination
83. that this instrument s own format does although there will be no problem for normal play back but does provide compatibility with other SMF compatible devices To load song data from SD card or save song data to SD card use Media mode p 46 PG p 141 The Compare function When you perform realtime recording step recording or track editing this function allows you to make before and after comparisons A If you continue editing when the COMPARE key is lit the key will go dark This now becomes the musical data that will be selected when the COM PARE key is dark Operations for which Compare is available Recording to a track Track Edit All commands except for the Utility menu com mands Memory Status and Rename Track of the SEQ 5 2 Track Edit page Recording to a pattern Pattern Edit All commands except for the Utility menu com mands Memory Status Rename Pattern FF REW Speed and Rename Track of the SEQ 5 1 RPPR Pattern page Song Edit SEQ 1 1 4 4 and 6 1 6 4 pages Utility menu com mands Delete Song and Copy From Song SEQ 2 1 Cue List page Page menu commands Convert to Song and Copy Song In general track and pattern event data can not be returned to its original state Comparing song parameters is possible only during song editing when executing a Utility menu com mand Operations for which Compare is not available Editing song parameters Utility m
84. the center position Similarly there is an AfterT Lock function that locks the aftertouch effect xx PG p 224 Press the SW2 key once again to defeat the lock Id In many programs and combinations the joystick Y axis lock function is assigned to the SW2 key REALTIME CONTROLS 1 2 3 4 These knobs can be used to control the filter cutoff fre quency and resonance the amp and filter EG volume portamento time pan pitch LFO or the send levels to the master effects etc D Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT key to switch the function of the realtime controllers to A mode B mode or C mode Each time you press the key A mode B mode or C mode will be selected alternately and the corre sponding LED will light REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT AO LPFCUTOFF RESONANCE HPF EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE I CJ ECC ASSIGNABLE 1 ASSIGNABLE 2 ASSIGNABLE 3 ASSIGNABLE 4 0 ARP GATE ARP VELOCITY TEMPO O S BRB Rotate the desired knob to control the sound etc A mode controls In A mode knobs 1 4 will control edit the follow ing functions Ed Placing the knobs in the center 12 o clock posi tion will produce the values specified by the pro gram parameters Knob 1 LPF CUTO FF Adjust the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter When you adjust the cutoff frequency of the filter the brightness of the sound will change The effect will depend on the settings of the prog
85. the song If you want to change the structure of the song the cue list lets you do so in an efficient way You can also use this as a jukebox function that will playback completed songs in the order you specify Cue List Step Song Repeat 01 S000 Intro 02 Intro Intro A A B Chorus 02 S001 A 02 Chorus A A B Chorus 03 S002 B 01 Chorus 04 S003 Chorus 02 A Solo Chorus Chorus Chorus Ending Ending 05 S001 A 02 06 S002 B 01 07 S003 Chorus 02 08 S001 A Solo 01 09 S003 Chorus 03 10 S004 Ending 02 Each unit in a cue list is called a step and each step contains a song number and the number of repeats Here we will use a cue list to combine the previously created songs S000 INTRO S001 VERSES and S002 CHORUS D Select SEQ 2 1 Cue List With the default settings song S000 will be selected for Step 01 and End will be selected for Step 02 0001 01 Lg i s t003 Stereo Strings E Ca 2 Press the F7 EDIT key You will be able to insert or delete songs into or from the cue list 0009 01 QU id C00 HEW CUELIST 00 sz COOF Stereo Strings Add a song to the Step area Use the cursor keys to select Step 02 and press the F4 INSERT key A song will be added to step 02 Use the VALUE controller to s
86. to the VALUE controllers As in the utility menu press the function key F1 F8 nearest Lg etc function button 2 to access the execution or operation screen In some cases a dialog box will appear Follow the directions shown in the dialog box To execute select LIKA press the F8 key To cancel without executing select press the F7 key The dialog box will close The EXIT key is equivalent to Cancel Done or Exit Urite Combination B96 Amp Driven WurTy Category 69 Keyboard To 5668 Amp Driven Wurly Function buttons 2 Press the function key F1 F8 nearest this button to execute the function Ce Lord Utility menu etc Text dialog box When you use the function keys to select Name a text dialog box will appear In this dialog box you can rename text e g the name of a program combination or song p 44 Scroll bar This indicates that the list contains selections or parameters that cannot all be shown in the screen at once Use the cursor keys a a v gt to move within the list f BG16 Rez Sweep Scroll i BG32 Analog Piano bar BO38 Garage PWM Page menu In Combination Program Sequencer Global or Sampling if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed modes pressing the MENU key will display a list of the pages in that mode The page in which you where when you pressed the MENU key will be highlighted To select a page pr
87. to maximize the effect of the Attack Time adjustment the amp EG Start Level Attack Level Start Level Modulation and Attack Time Modula tion parameters are also adjusted Decay Time Indicates the decay time and slope time of the filter EG and amp EG IFX Balance This simultaneously adjusts the W D Wet Dry balance of all insert effect MFX Balance This simultaneously adjusts the Return 1 and 2 parameters of the master effects A Depending on the settings of the program parame ters the result may not be noticeable If you want to save the modified sound select the utility menu command Write Program and write the program p 43 Itis a good idea to edit the name when you write the program E3 If you want to overwrite the program using the same program number press the REC WRITE key and then press the F8 key amp The edited content will be lost if you select another program or turn off the power before saving Realtime controls The REATIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs can be used to edit parameters such as the filter cutoff frequency resonance the amp and filter EG volume portamento time pan pitch LFO and master effect send level etc vs p 25 You can also modify settings for the arpeggiator p 27 A If CC 70 79 are assigned to REALTIME CON TROLS A mode or B mode the sound edited by knobs 1 4 can be saved by the Program Write operation r p 43 Arpeggiator related settings in C mo
88. will not be possible to enter this mode Press the F3 In Pref key to select the SMPL 1 1 Recording Input Pref page iei Sample ec J nzrref VINHA In the Input1 area set BUS to L R specifying the bus to which the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack will be input Make sure that the Input level Lv1 is 127 and the Pan is L000 Be aware that when BUS is changed from Off to L R or IFX the volume level to the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks or to the headphones may rise abruptly 2 Setthe recording level CD Speak into the mic at the volume that you will use for recording If the display indicates ADC OVER AD con verter input overload turn the rear panel LEVEL knob in the direction of MIN to adjust the level appropriately For the ideal audio quality the level should be slightly lower than when the ADC OVER dis play appears i e the highest level that does not produce an overload 2 Press the REC WRITE key Speak into the mic at the volume that you will use for recording The level meter will show the input volume SMPL 1 1 Recording input Fret Recording Level 7 ML E p Limpe ee er O O UMS If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE controller to lower the Recording Level slider located in the right of the display from the 0 0 setting down to an appropriate level 9 When you have finished making adjustments pres
89. within each page In pages of Combination Sequencer mode that show timbres 1 8 tracks 1 8 or 9 16 such as COMBI 1 1 Play Prog hold down the TIMBRE TRACK key and press the F1 T1 T9 F8 T8 T16 keys to move the cursor EN TER key numeric keys 0 9 Access the Utility menu commands of each page up to ten items Hold down the ENTER key and press a numeric key 0 9 to select from up to ten of the Utility menu items EN TER key keyboard By holding down the ENTER key and pressing a note on the keyboard of the TR you can perform the follow ing input operations Input note number values or velocity values Select KEY in GLOBAL 5 1 DKit SEQ 5 1 RPPR RPPR Setup page EN TER key LOCATE key In Sequencer mode set the current location as the Location equivalent to the Utility menu command Set Location LL un uan ce ee Iu Nw Ew I EX AX NM AM A E UN NE NUN uS Uu uU B Umum Lm MM M LM uw Mw L wm uw EU wu NH Nu 8 ws Uwe mnm L Troubleshooting If you experience problems refer to the relevant item and take the appropriate measures Power does not turn on sthe AC AC power supply connected to an Outl t asa side eein orca tee obse e yere eret oai o p 12 s the POWER switch turned on Turn on the rear panel POWER switch The power is turned on but nothing is shown in the LCD screen The TR functions normally when you play the key b
90. 0 and then use the Utility menu command Copy From Song in SEQ 1 1 etc to copy it to other songs so that the settings will be consistent Copy Song 986 Intro From After your cue list is finished and you convert it into a song the track settings program pan vol ume etc of each step will be converted into play back data and will be reproduced but if the MIDI channel settings do not match it may not be possi ble to convert the playback state of the cue list into a song Using a foot switch to switch the Step You can use a foot switch to switch the Step If you set Rep Repeat to FS a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWTICH jack will control the tim ing at which the song stops repeating Set Foot SW Assign GLOBAL 1 1 System Foot page to Cue Repeat Control Converting a cue list to a song Although it is not possible to record additional mate rial onto tracks in a cue list you can convert a cue list to a song and then record solos etc on vacant tracks You will also need to convert a cue list to a song if you wish to save it onto an SD card as SMF data CD Select the Utility menu command Convert to Song A dialog box will appear In To specify the destination song number for the converted data The cue list name will automatically be assigned as the song name of the converted data For details and cautions regarding Convert to Song refer to PG
91. 002 L and 0003 LOOP1 140B0002 R will be automatically assigned to Index 1 amp Please refer to A note on saving samples p 93 for a cautionary note regarding the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes 41 Quick Start Sampling recording a sample 42 3 ii LLIS pang In S TID TTT LLL T Saving data Types of data that can be saved On the TR there are three ways to save data writing to internal memory saving on external media SD card etc and MIDI data dump Writing to internal memory The following data that you edit can be written into internal memory Program Programs 0 127 in banks A D Combination Combinations 0 127 in banks A C Global settings Page 1 14 1 User drum kits 00 INT 23 User User arpeggio Patterns 000 INT 215 User User template songs U00 U15 Song settings such as the song name and tempo track settings r p 64 arpeggiator settings and effect settings can be saved Write to internal mem ory However the musical data for song tracks and patterns are not saved to internal memory Further more settings that govern how the musical data is played back such as Meter Metronome Play Mute Track Play Loop including Start End Mea sure and RPPR settings will not be saved either Use the Sequencer mode Utility menu command Save Template Song to write this data PG p 54 amp Data that you edit in Sequencer or Sampling
92. 1 2 Loop Track Play Loop page will appear SER 1 2 Loop Track ia ET Loop Loop End Meas LE Ec Fist Loops A VISA E Check track 1 Loop On leave Loop Start Meas as it is and set Loop End Meas to 008 When you press the START STOP key the drum youp y phrase will be played back repeatedly When the playback has repeated for the number of measures in the song as specified by Length the power on default is 64 measures it will stop auto matically By using Play Intro you can begin the loop after 34 g y y g P adding an introduction PG p 58 noe Track Play Loop will continue repeating for the number of measures specified by Length If you want to limit the number of repetitions or place other performance data e g a drum fill in in that track you will need to expand the pattern into actual performance data Use the SEQ 5 2 Track Edit Utility menu command Repeat Measure to specify the number of playback repetitions and expand the pattern as playback data In the sample illustration below performance data will be cre ated to play measures 1 8 of track 1 for four times i e 32 measures Repeat Measure of Track 01 From Measure 661 To End of Measure 608 Times OAN Tracks 3 Recording the bass track CD If playback is occurring press the START STOP key to stop playback Press the LOCATE key to return to the beginning of the son
93. 1 Ed InsertFX This is where you create the basic combination consisting of the programs you select here First use 2 1 Ed Prog Mix to select the program for each timbre and then use 3 3 Ed Key Zone and 3 4 Ed Vel Zone to specify the range in which each pro gram will sound layer split velocity switch etc Then adjust the volume of each timbre and set various other parameters To add finishing touches to the sound you can make insert effect settings in 7 1 Ed InsertFX and master effect and master EQ settings in 7 2 Ed MasterFX that are separate from the effect settings of Program mode In addition you can make arpeggiator settings in 6 1 Ed Arp and controller settings in 2 2 Ed Ctrl to create the finished combination note By using the Utility Solo Selected Timbre you can listen only to the selected timbre This is a con venient way to audition individual sounds of tim bres that are layered p 34 In pages that display all timbres 1 8 such as 2 1 Ed Prog Mix you can use the gt keys to select timbres You can also select timbres directly by holding down the TIMBRE TRACK key and pressing one of the F1 T1 T9 F8 T8 T16 keys Timbre1 Insert Effect Timbre2 Parameters 7 1 1 Parameters Timbre3 Insert Effect 74 2 3 Parameters Master Effect 1 2 Program _ _ _ ________ gt Timbre Timb
94. 12 PG p 233 Is the MIDI data being received on the channel on which it is being transmitted vi PG p 129 This instrument does not respond correctly to incoming MIDI data Are the GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI page MIDI Filter settings Enable Program Change Bank Combi Ctrl Change and AfterT each checked sue ve PG p 130 e Ifyou wish to receive MIDI exclusive messages is the GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI page MIDI Filter Exclusive item checked vj PG p 131 Does this instrument support the types of messages that are being sent to it Can t format the SD card Does the media meet the requirements for use on the TR2 i oie dere a is p 100 Is the media inserted correctly p 14 Can t save load data on an SD card Is the card inserted correctly ij p 14 s the card formatted p 100 PG p 156 s the SD card set to the protected setting Turn off the write protect switch insert the card back into the slot and perform the save or load operation once again mesici s i p 100 Pressing the SAMPLIN G key does not enter Sam pling mode Is the EXB SMPL installed correctly vs PG p 260 Cannot input sound Is the EXB SMPL installed correctly vs PG p 260 Is your audio source connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks ccccccccsictissscecscsiseessssssdenseetectees
95. 1474 1C00 NEU CUELIST 00 T88 Lead Synth EDdz Ezprezz Lead LH Select 61 M6661 S606 INTRO Currently 5 582 M0009 S001 VERSES playing 835 M0025 5882 CHORUS step tep i Starting measure of that step Current Step Step The arrow will indicate the currently playing step indicates the currently selected Step If you set Current Step while stopped the display will change e M Indicates the starting measure of that step Meter Indicates the currently playing time signature This cannot be changed The name of a cue list can be specified by the Rename Cue List page menu command When you play the keyboard the program of the track selected by Track Select will sound If a different program is selected for each song the program specified for the currently playing song will sound note Cue list editing will automatically end if you press the START STOP key etc EEA Sl 73 Basic fundions mode 74 If playback is not connected smoothly between songs when playing a cue list Depending on the effect settings a certain amount of time may be required for the effects to be switched If this occurs the playback will not be smoothly con nected from song to song To ensure a smooth transition from song to song check FX for Step 01 Do not check FX for the remaining steps This way the effect settings will be made before playback begins and there will be no tim
96. 2 1 7 2 of Program mode or Combination mode the changes you make will affect the data in the edit buffer If you wish to save this modified data into internal memory you must perform the Write operation When you perform the Write operation the data in the edit buffer is written to the specified program number or combination number of the specified bank If you select another program or combination without writing the data of the newly selected program or combination will be called into the edit buffer and your changes will be lost 1 H x amp t 01253456789 5425 SRBCDEFGH JKLMNOPORSTUUMXYZ E 1 abcde tgh i jkImioparstuvuxuz l N Meane s JEse ell JL Mice 0r A When you press the COMPARE key in Program mode or Combination mode the data from mem ory i e the contents that were written into mem ory will be temporarily called into the edit buffer This allows you to compare the settings you are editing with the original un edited settings For example if you wish to input the text shown in the screen shown above you would use the follow ing procedure 2 Press the F1 Clear key All text of the text box will be erased Input A Editing applies to the data in the edit Use the VALUE dial the INC DEC keys or buffer Programs or combinations will cursor keys a A v gt to select A i d to the data in the edit Press the ENTER key or F6 Ie ke
97. 61 666 PROG Bnk D No 975 M661 602 6t 61 601 D2 Uel 12 L 666 094 M661 603 Bt 61 695 D 2 Vel 127 L 606 096 M661 664 Bt 61 191 E2 L 881 888 Sve finan In the SEQ 5 1 RPPR Pattern page press the SEQUENCER START STOP key and pattern U00 will begin playing If you press the C 2 key in the SEQ 5 1 RPPR RPPR Setup page the RPPR function will begin playing pat tern U00 As in step you can change the playback tempo with out affecting the pitch Global mode In Global mode you can make settings that affect the entire TR such as user scales category names drum kits and user arpeggio patterns v PG p 123 This chapter will describe the procedure for editing a drum kit For the procedure of editing a user arpeggio pattern refer to Arpeggiator settings p 103 For details on the parameters of other pages p 117 When you play the keyboard in Global mode the TR will sound as in the previous mode in which you were previously Be aware that if you moved from Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed to Global mode in a state where the sampling memory contained no data such as immediately after the power is turned on playing the keyboard will not produce sound A When you move from Sequencer to Global mode playing the keyboard will sound the program or arpeggiator that corresponds to the global MIDI channel set in GLOBAL 2 1 The settings that you edit in Global mode a
98. 67 84 DEGEOGO P E ette 90 92 Stereo source sssssseseeeee 90 SW1 SW2 ssssseseeeee 5 24 119 Synchronization Arpegglator eerte 111 System exclusive data 42 102 T yr t 10 Template Song 63 65 Tempo Arpeggiator Su A Text dialog box Three elements of sound Timbre Time Slc scinsioni Time Stretch cann Tone 5 24 50 52 56 108 Sound at the specified pitch 109 Track Play Loop 66 Track status ssssssss 80 TANS POSE ie eee bee 60 Tremolo auto pan 52 Tr nCate oe etie 41 Tuning isses 117 U Use DKit Setting 99 User arpeggio pattern 30 107 Chordal pattern Drum pattern Melody Us r pattern eee User template song 63 Utility menu 10 V VALUE controller 6 10 11 16 Velocity 26 58 118 Velocity crossfading 61 Velocity curve 118 Velocity drumsample switching 98 Velocity multisample switching 50 Velocity SW LH 51 Velocity switch 58 61 Velocity ZON Eticii tiores 61 Vibrato effect sess 52 Volume 5 18 24 32 34 50 52 54 58 59 Combination s 59 Sampling Sequencer W Wah effect sssssseseeeee
99. As an alternative multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto multiple tracks This is the method you will use when using the RPPR function and the arpeggiator function to record multiple tracks of musical data at once or when you playback existing sequence data on an exter nal sequencer and record it onto this instrument s sequencer in realtime p 76 Overwrite With this method the musical data previously recorded on a track is overwritten by the newly recorded data When you perform overwrite record ing on a previously recorded track its musical data will be replaced by the newly recorded data Normally you will use this method to record and then modify the results by using other types of real time recording or event editing D Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Over Write SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page REC Setup OU OT UU ete ad REC Setup PGR je MANE pa ie Mani munti REC RERSIMVP Dei ries Erro a rope i Tris 36 l Pref MN c L In Location specify the location at which you wish to begin recording 4 Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key If Metronome Setup has the default settings the metronome will sound for a two measure pre count and then recording will begin Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the joystick to record your performance
100. C Play REC page Song 000 Meter 4 4 Tempo 120 000 NEW OE ORPPR T i eun a Play RE SEQ 1 1 Play REC Prog 8 page Track01 Program D072 SER 1 1 Play REC Program Proaram Select 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 Reso Hi 42128 Manu Weub Fazt SH A PE c ALR III GE GE 429 4D GE GR GER As an example try setting aA Tempo to 100 Notice that even if you change the playback tempo the pitch does not change m If the beat of the rhythm loop sample is not repro duced correctly or if you hear unwanted noise when you change the tempo the reason may be that slicing was not performed optimally in step The accuracy with which each rhythm instru ment sound is separated will significantly affect the quality of the playback Try adjusting the sepa ration of each sample in step m In some cases playing back at a slower tempo may cause the playback to sound unnatural because of regions of silence between samples Conversely when you play back at a faster tempo unnatural noise may occur between samples To avoid such problems set Stretch New BPM or Ratio in step to the tempo that you will use during play back When you execute the time stretch com mand the length of each sample will be adjusted appropriately PG p 112 step In Song Select select 001 The song data that you specified in step 7 has been set created automatically as shown below e SEQ 1 1 Play REC Play REC page Song 001
101. F LOCATE SEQUENCER SAMPING if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed control keys REC WRITE START STOP Other AUDITION key CATEGORY key Audio outputs 1 4 AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R 1 4 AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 Output impedance 1 1 kQ L MONO is 550 Q for mono Maximum output level L MONO R INDIVIDUAL 1 2 11 6 dBu Load impedance 100 kQ or greater 1 4 AUDIO OUTPUT HEADPHONE 12 0 dBu Output impedance 33 9 Maximum output level 36 mW Load impedance 33 9 Audio inputs if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed AUDIO INPUT 1 2 LEVEL MIC LINE switch LEVEL knob Input impedance 10 kQ Nominal level LINE 3 dBu INPUT knob min 30 dBu INPUT knob max MIC 18 dBu INPUT knob min 53 dBu INPUT knob max Maximum level LINE 13 dBu INPUT knob min 20 dBu INPUT knob max MIC 8 dBu INPUT knob min 43 dBu INPUT knob max dB dB Source impedance 600 Q Control inputs DAMPER half damper supported ASSIGNABLE SWITCH PEDAL MIDI MIDI IN OUT THRU USB B connector SD card slot Usable media 2 7 3 6 V 16 MB 1 GB Other AC power inlet switch Support for options EXB SMPL one 16Mbyte 72 pin SIMM is included 72 pin SIMM memory slots x 2 for sample data RAM Dimensions W x D x H 61 key model 1045 x 302 x 95 mm 76 key model 1257 x 302 x 95 mm
102. IE Lampie M Rec ingre TS m If you want to create a new multisample use the numeric keys to input the number of the multi sample that you want to create and press the ENTER key Set Orig K Original Key and TopK Top Key to C2 When you play the key designated by Orig K the sample will sound at the same pitch at which it was sampled You can make this setting easily by holding down the ENTER key and pressing the C2 key Press the F3 In Pref key to access the SMPL 1 1 Recording Input Pref page Ercrari na N A rT Set Create Range Zone Range to 001 When you create a new index the width of the zone will be set to one key 5 Record a sample D Press the F1 Sample key to access the SMPL 1 1 Recording Sample page TE Index 881 7001 eo Mibi TEE E E E HI es SMPL No Rssign OrigK C2 Topk ENIM pompie M Rec ingre TS Press the REW WRITE key Press the START STOP key to enter record ready mode 36 Speak the word that you want to sample Exam ple It s Recording will start when the input exceeds the Threshold level When you finish speaking press the START STOP key to stop sampling A sample has now been created The sample you recorded is automatically assigned to SMPL Sample Sample Select Index 661 661 eo Miki TEE E E E es SMPL EEEIERTHTEETTAEBCGELI Orig K C2 Topk Cc2 zempieJ Rec J n rres
103. If the SD card contains an identically named file you will be asked whether you want to Overwrite If you want to overwrite press the F8 OK key If you want to save without overwriting press the F7 Cancel key repeat the procedure from step rename the data in step and then save it A If when saving a KSC file the save destination media already contains a directory with the same name as the KSC file you are attempting to save a message of File already exists will be displayed and it will not be possible to execute the Save operation If this occurs you can either change the name of the KSC file you are saving change the name of the directory on the media or delete the directory from the media before executing the Save opera tion When the data has been saved and you return to the Save page the LCD screen will show the file that has been saved The data will be saved as the following files PCG file Programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings that were saved in internal memory SNG file Sequencer songs and cue lists KSC file Files listing the multisamples and samples created in Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed Directory A directory containing the multisamples KMP files and samples KSF files that are listed in the KSC file Other ways to save In addition to Save All the page menu comma
104. KSC KMP and KSF files and the data does not fit on a single SD card or other vol ume of media another dialog box will appear and you will be asked to specify the next volume of media PG p 152 If the data does not fit on the media when saving MIDI data dump The programs A D combinations A C drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings of internal memory and sequencer songs cue lists can be trans mitted as MIDI exclusive data and saved on a con nected MIDI data filer computer or another TR s PG p 131 ic functions Saving data 47 Restoring the factory settings Loading the preloaded data The factory settings are referred to as the preloaded data The action of restoring the programs combina tions and global settings of the TR to their factory set tings is referred to as loading the preloaded data A This operation will rewrite any data that had been previously written If you do not want to lose the previously written data you must first save it to SD card or external SCSI media requires the EXB SMPL option p 46 D Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode The key will light Press the EXIT key You will be in the Global mode 1 1 System page GLOBAL 1 1 Sustem Basic MasterTunelCent Basic i FX SU Auto Arp Master Tune BEE 440 00H2 iQIFX off i Program Key Transpose 66 OMFX1 Off i Combi Velocity Curve 4 Normal MF
105. L 1 1 Recording Recording REC Mode Sample Setup Bank 1 1 i Count Down Off Pre Trigger aaams Mode DEINEN d 120 Limpe nec Fre VIA ic functions Sampling mode 89 90 Select the 1 1 Recording Sample page Sample MultizampleSelect MS EEERIITIERE TT Index a1 881 E tinm didi ul Pe No Rssign Oria K C2 TopK B2 Press the REC WRITE key ing Recording Sample Mode Bank 1 i ode AMEE RARI Count Down 0ff d 120 Pre Trigger aaams Sample Setup Time 87 3815 REC Setup Mode Manual Lsompre Rs J n rres WEE USA For MS Multisample Select select 000 NewMS 000 Immediately after the power is turned on 000 NewMS 000 will be created automatically Use the numeric keys 0 9 to input the multisam ple number that you wish to record and press the ENTER key If you select a new number the Create New Multi sample dialog box will appear Press the F8 OK key and the new multisample will be created Create New Multisample 001 Stereo To specify the name use the Utility menu command Rename MS In SMPL Sample Select select the sample that you wish to record For this example select No Assign You may sample even in this condition The sample will be automatically recorded to a vacant sample number If you wish to start by specifying the samp
106. M key to select a bank The key will light and the selected bank will be dis played in the left of the LCD screen For example to select bank B press the BANK B key The B key will light and the upper left of the LCD screen will indicate Bank B 000 127 for preloaded programs for user programs 001 128 GM programs cs VNL GM2 drum programs A B C D With the factory settings these banks contain a wide variety of preloaded programs that use the internal PCM ROM multisamples effects and arpeggio patterns 128 programs can be written or rewritten to each bank A D for a total of 512 G g d These banks contain 128 GM programs and 9 GM drum programs that are compatible with the GM sound map The programs of these banks are read only Bank G contains the GM programs G lets you select 128 pro grams numbered from 001 128 and g d lets you select nine drum programs VNL Each time you press the GM key the bank will alternate as shown below G9g d Gg d G ve For details of the program names etc refer to VNL Voice Name List 21 Quick Start Seleding and playing a program 22 Selecting programs by category You can select programs by categories such as key board organ bass and drums With the factory settings all the preloaded programs are organized into sixteen categories You can choose a category and then select from the programs in that cat egory
107. M luni 3 Press the START STOP key 4 To stop playback press the START STOP key once again If the last step is End playback will stop automati cally when it reaches that point If the last step is Continue to Step01 playback will return to the first step and continue To select a cue list choose Cue List Select and use the same procedure as when selecting a song Refer to step above Contents of the preloaded data and demo songs Preload PCG e Preloaded data programs combinations drum kits arpeggio patterns global settings nofe When you load the preloaded data it will be writ ten into internal memory This data is preserved even when the power is turned off amp When this data is loaded the current PCG data in the TR will be replaced If you do not want to lose this data save it to an SD card beforehand p 46 Demo Songs Demonstration song and demonstration cue list data nofe This data is loaded into the internal sequencer memory The data will be lost when the power is turned off When you load All Demo Songs any data cur rently in the sequencer will be rewritten If you wish to keep this data you must first save it on an SD card before loading All Demo Songs r p 46 Selecting and playing a program In Program mode you can select and play a program from banks A D G g d Here we will show how to select preset programs Select various programs and hear how th
108. NTER key and playing a note on the key board of this instrument Slope page Here you can specify the range of keys over which the original volume will be reached starting at the top key and bottom key In the case of the above example you could set the key zones so that a portion of timbres 1 and 2 overlaps i e is layered with timbre 3 and set Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound changes gradually instead of changing suddenly between B3 and C4 Velocity switch settings 3 4 Ed Vel Zone Here you can make settings for velocity switching and velocity crossfading Vel Velocity page For each timbre you can specify a range of velocities for which it will sound The range of velocities for which a timbre will sound is called the Velocity Zone By setting a velocity zone you can set up a timbre which will be sounded only by notes played at a cer tain strength and not by stronger or weaker notes By combining timbres that have differing velocity zone settings you can create velocity switched combina tions The upper and lower limits of the velocity zone of each timbre are determined by the Top Velocity and Bot tom Velocity respectively The following diagram shows an example of a velocity switched combination in velocity will switch between timbres 1 and 2 to play different programs Such combinations are created by setting the velocity zone Timbre 1 Timbre 2 Br 127 ass 64 Vel
109. OK key The following dialog box will appear Grid le Grid Resolution J Check Grid set Resolution to J and press the F8 OK key Set J Grid Tempo to 140 With these settings vertical dotted lines will be dis played at 140 BPM quarter note intervals SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit2 End Editt fl Edite TAL HIDE d zx cin gt UII Set E End When Lp Loop is On the dotted vertical Grid lines will start at LpS Loop Start If you want to set End at the end of one 4 4 measure the fourth vertical line from the LpS Loop Start line will be the end of the first measure Place E End at this vertical line SMPL _3 1 Loop Edit Edit2 End L LEditi fl Editz n L R RI 2014 pore pa E UTI Use Truncate to delete the unwanted data that is outside of the start or loop start and end addresses Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the utility menu and press the F7 key to select Truncate Press the F8 OK key The following dialog box will appear Truncate Sample 0000 Stereo Range Start 619274 EEnd 8181568 Truncate ZEE SGT Save to No L5 8802 R5 6683 Overwrite Set Truncate to Front amp End In this example we will not change the settings of the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes so press the F8 OK key to execute When you execute the operation the truncated samples 0002 LOOP1 140B0
110. OLS 1 4 es 119 vi Adjusting the contrast brightness of the LCD SCl een Ws 120 Using this instrument as a data filer 120 Tap tempo control nenne 120 Shortcuts wee 120 Appendices EEREREREEREREREEREREREERERERE 121 Troubleshooting 121 Specifications and options 124 Specifications nn 124 O perating requirements for connection to a computer 125 Options 125 MIDI Implementation Chart 126 lridex so evecta HH A Vll er a P O verview Effect section Main features Overview The TR Music Workstation features Korg s acclaimed HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system It contains high quality preset multisamples pro grams combinations an effect section plus a sequencer dual polyphonic arpeggiator RPPR four channel audio output and numerous other functional ity Controllers such as the joystick SW1 and SW2 keys REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs or connected pedals can be used to control filter or effects allowing you to modify the sound in realtime as you perform Arpeggiator gate or velocity or the tempo of the arpeg giator or sequencer can also be controlled In addition the optional EXB SMPL sampling upgrade can be installed to add two channel audio input and sampling functionality p 35 88 PG p 260 The TR is the ideal music workstation for music pro duction
111. ONTROLS 1 4 You can specify the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 PG p 225 The B mode functions are set independently for each program combination or song The functions in Sam pling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed are set for the entire mode These settings are made by Knob B Assign in the fol lowing pages Program mode PROG 2 2 Ed Ctrl Controls Combination mode COMBI 2 2 Ed Ctrl Controls Sequencer mode SEQ 2 2 Controller Controls Sampling mode SMPL 5 2 Controller Controls If the EXB SMPL option is installed hotel You can use these knobs as sources for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation and control program parameters or effect parameters In this case you will normally select Knob Mod 1 CC 17 Knob Mod 2 CC 19 Knob Mod 3 CC 20 and Knob Mod 4 CC 21 Here we will give an example of how knob 1 can be used to control the filter and amp EG attack of a pro gram D Press the PROG key to enter Program mode 2 Press the MENU key and then press the F2 key to select Ctrl Press the F8 Open key 9 Select the Knob 1 B Knob B Assign and select F A Attack CC 73 4 Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT key to select B mode and turn knob 1 to control the EG attack of the filter and amp If you wish to keep this setting after the power is turned off you must Write the Global set
112. PROG key to select the 1 1 Play page with the last selected combination number or program number LCD screen messages when separately sold options are installed When the power is turned on This instrument allows you to install separately sold options When the power is turned on the type of installed options will be displayed After installing an option be sure to check this display to verify that the option was installed correctly If the option is not displayed here even though it was installed it was not installed cor rectly Turn off the power and re install the option For details on installing an option refer to PG p 260 MUSIC WORKSTATION SIMM Slot C16MB SIMM Slot2 EXB SMPL OPTIONS EXB SMPL The EXB SMPL option is installed SIMM Slot1 MB Slot2 MB SIMM s are installed in SIMM slots 1 and or 2 The capacity of each SIMM is shown in parentheses Listening to the demo songs Loading demo playback data The TR contains demo songs and preloaded data This data can be loaded in Global mode D Press the GLOBAL key the key will light You will enter Global mode Verify that the GLOBAL 1 1 System page is dis played If it is not displayed press the EXIT key 2 Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the Utility menu 3 Press the F7 xz 1 key to select Load Pre load Demo Data and press the F8 OK key GLOBAL 1 1 Syster _ Basic B Master Tune
113. Pan of timbre 2 Use the cursor key a 44 v gt to choose Pan highlighted for timbre 2 Use the VALUE controller to change the value A setting of C064 is center L001 is far left and R127 is far right With a setting of RND the stereo loca tion will change randomly between left and right each time a note is played Adjusting the volume Adjust the Volume of timbre 2 Use the cursor key a v gt to choose Volume highlighted for timbre 2 Use the VALUE controller to change the value Aro ples kd COCA CAD COCA COGO COCAO COCA O IPOD Tx Y 2 Dees Legato Strings ch combi Eroa Jl Mix epigprI e NUR 34 compet prog Jb rs Jes LR eM When you change the Volume value of any tim bre the volume of all timbres will also change to preserve the volume balance at the time you checked the Hold Balance setting To cancel this setting choose Hold Balance once again and press the F8 OK key Writing the combination If you want to save the sound you modified select the utility menu command Write Combination and write it rs p 43 Itis a good idea to edit the name when you write the combination m If you want to overwrite the edited combination onto the same combination number press the REC WRITE key and then press the F8 key amp The edits you make will be lost if you select another combination or turn off the power before saving
114. Program mode in the 1 1 Play Pro gram page or for Combination mode in the 1 1 Play Combination page r p 26 m When you write a program or combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 keys is saved nole For details on making these settings refer to Set ting the function of SW1 and SW2 vs p 119 The Lock function Select program bank A001 Acoustic Piano and play the keyboard To select a program make sure that you are in Pro gram mode and press the Bank A key numeric key 1 and then the ENTER key Move the joystick toward yourself the Y direc tion The modulation will deepen and at the same time resonance will be applied to give a unique character to the sound While holding the joystick toward yourself press the SW2 screen The SW2 key will light The tone at this point will be maintained Lock function Release the joystick and play the keyboard The tone will stay the same as it was when the SW2 key was pressed Moving the joystick toward yourself will not affect the sound m In the lower part of the LCD screen SW2 will indi cate JS Y Lock This means that the function of the SW2 key is set to JS Y Lock It will operate as a Toggle switch If the function of the SW1 or SW2 key is set to JS X Lock JS Y Lock or JS Y Lock the tone that was heard when the joystick is tilted can be main tained even after the joystick is returned to
115. Quick Start Simple combination editing 33 Listening to the program sound of just one timbre O Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the utility menu and press the F7 key to choose Solo Selected Timbre Press the F8 OK key Now you will hear only the program sound of the currently selected timbre The lower part of the LCD screen will indicate Solo Prog Proaram Select o a m B 128 Resp Estrin Elect Ree Aey Elect Ra Fat Elroct C061 p A120 A126 H A126 A126 AGAS Redo Adjusting the volume while preserving the volume balance between timbres O Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the utility menu and press the F7 key to choose Hold Bal ance Press the F8 OK key LaL ora The upper right of the LCD screen will indicate Hold Bal 064 E Piano Heyb Estrin Feen Rean Ae EEL A Fast n BAG EAO NAOC OEO ub AC CEACE AGI Qo d Statusint CR ch Y 2 Dees Legato Strings To cancel this setting choose Solo Selected Tim bre once again and press the F8 OK key Adjusting the stereo location of the sound Select the Mixer page Press the F3 Mix key Here you can adjust the pan and volume for timbres 1 8 Mixer Pan 064 Modern Piano 4 128 eub Estrin Bell FAeery GALES FA Fat Elraozt E ioa orae Cota EA GRADE ORA 9960 i88420 127 28 1270 127 48 127 0 3s rs Lem roi IL mix Scare SOLET a Adjust the stereo location in
116. RESONANCE HPF 5 25 Restoring the factory settings 48 REVERT neve 10 Riff phrase 7 ROM drumsample 98 Routing AUDIO INDPUT 115 Combination Sequencer 114 PROBST AM vs aset 112 Sampling setis 114 Sample iate eie es Sampling Effect nenene Organization Sampling frequency Save 42 46 47 100 102 SD Catdosu ete eset 100 Select 10 s HOLD Combination 23 Program Arpeggio pattern 28 Category Combination Program eee Combination Combination bank Combination number Page eiecti Parameter PrOBYam oet Program bank Program number Tabu nncbiaHid eI Select by Category Selecting a tab Selecting mode Selecting parameter Send AUDIO INPUT 115 Combination Sequencer 114 PROSTAIN caeco ees 113 Sequencer Effedia Organization Setting a parameter Shortcuts eseeeee Shutdown Key SIMM iei eerie ee es Single SMF Standard MIDI File 42 102 SNG ile e 102 hop 64 Song data sssini 80 Split 58 60 STEP aee ea tate tiers 107 Step recording
117. ROG 7 1 Ed InsertFx BPM 128 TimeQver gt T Times 3 Levet28 iHiDamp 6 LoDamp ax Times 1 Level 26 dnLv1 Mod 100 Src EXE Times 1 Level 20 iSpread 10 Off 40 WD 58 58 Off 115 ic functions Effects settings Using the Dmod function to vary the feedback level by operating SW 1 key In the PROG 2 2 Ed Ctrl Controls page set the function of SW1 to SW1 Mod CC 80 Toggle 6 Return to the PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFX IFX page and set the C Fb C Delay Feedback Source to SW1 80 C Set Amount to 30 PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFx IFX LCR BPM Dela BPM 128 TimeOver gt LBs fF Times 3 Level 26 HiDamp 6 LoDamp 6 CBs J Times 1 Level 26 inLvl Mod 166 Src JS 7 1 RBs J Times 1 Level 26 Spread C Fb 10 SutTgoo AED 58 58 Off ud UTILITY Press the Exit key etc to return to the PROG 1 1 Play page When you move the joystick away from yourself and press the SW1 key the feedback level will increase and the delay sound will continue repeat ing The Amount setting determines the feedback level when the SW1 key is pressed If you set Amount to 10 and press the SW1 key the feedback level will be 0 Using the BPM MIDI Sync function to synchronize the delay time to arpeggiator tempo changes Set BPM to MIDI For L C and R set L C R Bs and Times as desired For this example set L C R Bs to 2 and Tim
118. SI device can be used in the same way as an SD card to save or load data Overview of the modes The TR has a large number of functions that let you play and edit programs and combinations record and play sequence data and manage data on media The largest unit used to organize these functions is called a mode The TR has five modes If the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed Sampling mode will be added for a total of six modes and you will be able to record and edit sam ples Program mode Select and play programs You can choose programs from rewritable banks A B C and D which contain a total of 512 programs and non rewritable bank G 128 programs compati ble with the GM standard and nine drum pro grams Edita program Make settings for the oscillator filter amp EG LFO effects and arpeggiator Select a multisample the following multisamples are available e 470 internal multisamples ROM EX Multisamples RAM created in Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed Create drum programs using a drum kit created in Global mode SAMPLING MODE if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT Multi Sample 1 2 mm GLOBAL MODE DRUM KIT Key Assign Drum Sample Sample H Drum Sample Sample L ARPEGGIATOR PATTERN User Pattern P0 4 User Pattern U00 215
119. The Compare function As you are editing a combi you can use the COM PARE key to listen to the previously saved version as it was before you began editing Press the COM PARE key the key light comes on to hear the original version Pressing COMPARE again the light goes dark returns you to the version you are editing A If you continue editing when the COMPARE key LED is lit the LED will go dark and the current sound will now be the sound that is recalled when the COMPARE key LED is dark In the section below we will edit typical parameters in each page while listening to the effect of each parameter For a more detailed explanation of these parameters refer to PG p 31 vee 0 0000000000000000000000009 Timbre 1 8 program pan and volume 2 1 Ed Prog Mix Here you can assign programs to each timbre 1 8 and set pan and volume for each These settings can also be made in the Prog and Mix pages of 1 1 Play Prog page T91 A113 Romance Piano Leea Lor T VS Program Select Assigns a program to each timbre nole You can use the Utility menu command Select by Category to select programs from 16 categories p 33 E3 You can also use the BANK and A GM keys to select the bank of the program amp If you wish to select programs by receiving MIDI program changes do so in P1 1 Play Mix Mixer page COMBI 2 1 Ed Prog Mixer volume UTILITY Pan Specifies the pa
120. Top 127 B Vel Btm 661 Top 127 O u Other settings for the arpeggiator You can also set Gate Velocity Swing and Scan Zone These parameters are set in PROG 6 1 Ed Arp COMBI 6 1 Ed Arp p 104 Linking the arpeggiator to program combinations You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings writ ten in a program or combination will also be selected when you switch programs or combinations or whether the arpeggiator status will not change when you switch programs or combinations With the factory settings the former is selected Use the latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio pattern running and change only the program sound This setting is made in Auto Arp GLOBAL 1 1 Sys tem Basic Creating a user arpeggio pattern Arpeggio patterns that you create can be written to U000 INT 215 User These can be created in GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern p 108 Playing with the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function This instrument s Sequencer mode provides an RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function Using the RPPR function each note of the keyboard can be assigned to a preset pattern or user pattern and a track that will play the assigned pattern You can then playback the assigned pattern in realtime and record it if desired simply by playing a note Preset patterns suitable for playing by the drum track are already provided in internal memory
121. U Meter d 4 Reso Hi 2 126 Auto Song Select a UUM Baal te Lille Lo PST T 0 Iz RPPR T61 TRACK 61 T81 CO0d HiptHop hit ptas ReclFrog libro tell hin 2 ie Pres 7 USD If the SEO 1 1 Play REC Play REC page does not appear select it as follows 1 Press the MENU key The LCD screen will show a list of the pages in Sequencer mode Select and 2 Press the F1 key to select P R and press the F8 OPEN key 3 Press the F1 key The SEQ 1 1 Play REC Play REC page will be displayed 8 Use the cursor keys a v to choose Song Select The song name will be highlighted 4 Use the INC DEC keys or other VALUE control lers to select the demo song that you wish to play Press the START STOP key The key will blink and the selected song will play If you wish to stop playback press the START STOP key once again Quick Start Listening to the demo songs 19 20 Playing a cue list Here s how to playback the demonstration cue list By using a cue list you can repeatedly play multiple songs that you specify in the cue list or play songs consecutively p 73 Press the MENU key Press the F2 key to select Cue and then press the F8 OPEN key The SEQ 2 1 Cue List Setup amp Play page will appear 0001 01 00 14 2 C0 Demo Medies E004 HipHop Kit 92 M8 1491 S66 1 Midniaht Sun 83 e226 Continue to Stepi R
122. UIR MUSIC WORKSTATION Operation Guide Please read this guide first 5cz em MOS b His leeds 22 UINEEENL os crm r TU i GENERAL To ensure long trouble free operation please read this manual carefully Precautions Location Using the unit in the following locations can result in a malfunction Indirect sunlight Locations of extreme temperature or humidity Excessively dusty or dirty locations Locations of excessive vibration Power supply Please connect the designated AC AC power sup ply to an AC outlet of the correct voltage Do not connect it to an AC outlet of voltage other than that for which your unit is intended Interference with other electrical devices This product contains a microcomputer Radios and televisions placed nearby may experience reception interference Operate this unit at a suitable distance from radios and televisions Handling To avoid breakage do not apply excessive force to the switches or controls Care If the exterior becomes dirty wipe it with a clean dry cloth Do not use liquid cleaners such as ben zene or thinner or cleaning compounds or flamma ble polishes Keep this manual After reading this manua
123. X2 Off AfterT Curve 3 Normal i ptasie JL Pref I Foot Maudin UE 3 Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the Utility menu Press the F7 L 71 key to select Load Pre load Demo Data and press the F8 OK key A dialog box will appear Load Preload Demo Data Kind EA Use the INC DEC keys to select the data that you want to load Use Kind to select the data that you want to load For this example select All Preload PCG PCG files contain program combination drum kit arpeggio pattern and global setting data 6 Press the F8 OK key A dialog box will ask you for confirmation Load Preload Demo Data fire you sure Once again press the F8 OK key All the preloaded data will be loaded 48 amp 1f the Memory Protected dialog box appears un check the memory protect setting and perform the load operation once again t p 43 Loading individual banks or data items The TR allows you to load individual banks programs or combinations Drum kits and arpeggio patterns can also be loaded individually or as a group This is convenient when you want to restore just one item of factory set data or when you want to rearrange combinations in a specific order for live performance A Itis of course also possible to rearrange programs but you should be aware that this may change the sounds that are used by a combination p 43 As an example
124. XB SMPL Operation Man ual Basic operation Selecting modes pages and tabs setting parameters 1 Selecting modes O In order to use a particular function on the TR you must first select the appropriate mode Press one of the front panel mode keys to enter the correspond ing mode COMBI key Combination mode PROG key Program mode SEO key Sequencer mode GLOBAL key Global mode MEDIA key Media mode SAMPLING key Sampling mode if the sepa rately sold EXB SMPL option is installed SAMPLING a EXB SMPL 2 Selecting pages and tabs Each mode has a large number of parameters which are grouped into pages Each page is further divided into as many as seven groups These are referred to as tabs Selecting a page CD Make sure that the desired mode is selected To select a mode press the appropriate mode key Here we will use Combination mode as an example for our explanation Press the COMBI key elec 2 Press the MENU key The page menu will appear fd In Media mode there is only one page so the page menu will not appear Press the function key F1 F7 that is nearest the page you wish to select If multiple pages are assigned to one function key press the same key to move the cursor downward You can also use the a 4 v gt cursor keys to move 4 Press the F8 Open key When you press the F8 key you will jump to the s
125. Y to select the key to which the pattern will be assigned Select C 2 This can also be selected by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note C2 and lower keys are used to stop playback and cannot be assigned Check the Assign check box Set Pat Pattern Bank to the Pre pattern type and set Pattern Select to pattern P121 HipHop 1 HipHop Set Track to T01 Drums The selected pattern will be played according to the settings program etc of the track you select here Assign patterns to other keys Set KEY to D2 Press the F4 REVERT key The settings for Assign Pat Pattern Bank Pattern Select and Track will be set to the val ues that were specified earlier in steps 7 Choose Pattern Select and press the INC key once to select P122 HipHop 2 HipHop fe By using REVERT in this way you can work efficiently when the patterns to be assigned have consecutive or nearby numbers or use the same track SER 5 1 RPPR T91 Drums KEY D2 F RPPR Setup Pattern Select BOO04 HipHop Kit J 090 assign LIMIT Pat Pre APAGO M Manual ou 88 mee T81 Drums Sunc ts nere JE 52 ER Use the above method to assign several patterns from the range of P123 HipHop 3 HipHop P135 HipHop 15 HipHop 8 Press the C 2 key The assigned pattern will play Take your finger off the C 2 key and press the D2 key The patter
126. a in the Sampling mode is not backed up when the power is turned off If you wish to keep this data you must save it onto an SD card or external SCSI device before turning off the power After the power is first turned on memory will not contain any multisample or sample data You must first load previously saved data before you can playback or edit any sample data Preparations for sampling Connections and settings for a monaural source When sampling in monaural from a mic the output of an external audio device or mixer or an instrumental sound such as guitar or synthesizer connect the source to the AUDIO INPUT 1 or 2 m Guitars and other instruments with active pickups can be input directly but instruments with passive pickups i e without internal preamps cannot be recorded at an appropriate level due to imped ance mismatching When connecting such instru ments use a preamp or effect device EXB SMPL AUDIO INPUT LEVEL MIC UNE MAX MIN L600 O EXB SMPL MIC D Connect the mic or external audio device to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to match the input source For input sources with a low input level such as a microphone select the MIC position For other sources select the LINE position amp The AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch affects both the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks The LEVEL knob will be adjusted later For now set
127. ad user arpeggio patterns VNL An arpeggio pattern that you create can also be stored as a user arpeggio pattern r p 107 Using the arpeggiator in Program mode D Press the PROG key to enter Program mode and select a program p 21 Selecting and playing a program As you select various programs you will notice that the ARP ON OFF key LED will light for some programs p 30 Other settings for the arpeggia tor Play the keyboard of the TR and the arpeggio will start For other programs you can press the ARP ON OFF key the key will light to turn on the arpeggia tor Arpeggios will begin sounding when you play the keyboard 2 As described in the following sections Settings using controllers and Settings in the LCD screen move the controllers or modify the param eters to change the way in which the arpeggios are played Settings using controllers Arpeggiator on off O Each time you press the ARP ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on off When this is on the key will light and playing the keyboard will start the selected arpeggio pattern REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT BO ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE 2 ASSIGNABLE 3 ASSIGNABLE 4 1 st m ARP GATE ARP VELOCITY TEMG BOOB note The on off status is saved when you write the pro gram Combination LPF CUTOFF RESONANCE HPF EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE A In Combination and Song depending on the arpeggiator A B se
128. affect the pitch filter amp EG LFO effects etc LFO and delay time parameters can be synchronized to MIDI clock tempo You can synchronize sounds or effects to the tempo of the sequencer or the arpeggiator Programs and combinations In the Program mode the TR provides 512 user programs plus 128 programs 9 drum sets for GM compatibility When shipped from the factory it is loaded with high quality programs that cover a wide range of musical needs The 512 user programs can be modified by adjusting the numerous editing parameters the effects and the arpeggiator to create your own original pro grams The TR provides 24 user drum kits and nine GM2 compatible ROM drum kits With the factory settings preset drum kits that cover a variety of musical genres are provided You can create your own original drum kits by assigning a drumsample or an original sampled sound to each note of the keyboard For each note you can make filter and amp settings and even route the sound through effects and to a individual audio output The TR provides 384 user combinations The factory settings contain a wide variety of Preload combinations A combination allows you to use layers splits or velocity switches etc to combine up to eight pro grams together with effects and two arpeggiators in order to create complex sounds that could not be produced by a program You can also make settings that include external tone generators S
129. am to a negative value GLOBAL 6 1 Ar Edi Drum pattern You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern by using Fixed Note with a drum program Select a drum kit program For this example select preset program A020 Stan dard Kit 1 Select the GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Setup page and set the parameters Check Fixed Note If this is checked tones will always sound at the specified pitch If you set Mode Fixed Note Mode to Trigger All Tones playing a single note will cause all Tones to sound If you set Mode Fixed Note Mode to Trigger As Played the notes you play will determine how Tones are sounded p 110 GLOBAL 6 1 fArp Tupe Rs PI Octave Motion Up setup JL Edit n CO Mode Trigger As Plaged Fixed Note Tone No Fixed Note No Mode Fixed Note Mode If Fixed Note is checked you will be able to set Tone No and Fixed Note No Select Tone No and then set Fixed Note No to specify the note number that the tone will sound Here set Tone No and Fixed Note No as fol lows Tone No Fixed Note No 00 C2 kick 01 F2 snare 02 F 3 closed hi hat 03 A 3 open hi hat The drumsamples that correspond to each note number will differ depending on the drum kit You will find it convenient to audition the drum sounds from the keyboard and then input the Fixed Note No by holding down the ENTER key an
130. ample we will explain the procedure for applying an insert effect to a stereo source and sam pling the result CD Make the settings of step 1 and 2 in Connec tions and settings for a stereo source 2 Set the various Input 1 and Input 2 parame ters Set BUS to IFX for both Input 1 and 2 Set Lvl and Pan to the same settings as in step 9 of Connections and settings for a stereo source With these settings the stereo source will be sent to insert effect IFX 8 Use the LEVEL knob to adjust to a suitable input level Refer to step 6 of Connections and set tings for a monaural source Select the 7 1 Insert Effect Setup page SMPL 7 1 insert Effect Setup insert Effect 1 setup L Unt E Make settings for Insert Effect IFX On Off and the Pan CC 8 of the sound after it has passed through the insert effect PG p 27 121 Examples of settings using the insert effect are given in Mode Sample Mode PG p 93 Manual sampling There are two methods of sampling manual and auto In manual mode sampling is started by pressing the START STOP key from the recording standby condi tion entered by pressing the REC WRITE key once For the sampling procedure in auto mode refer to Auto sampling p 90 D Select the 1 1 Recording Recording page For Mode REC Mode select Manual This will select manual recording mode SMP
131. ance data is recorded However do not change the key of track 1 which uses a drum kit A If you change the key of a track that is using a drum kit the relationship between the notes and the instruments of the drum kit will be shifted so that the rhythm instruments will not sound cor rectly About editing Song editing In addition to copying and renaming a song other operations such as Delete can be performed from the Utility menu commands in pages such as SEQ 1 1 Play REC PG p 52 Track editing Event Editing allows you to edit or insert data in a recorded track In addition commands such as Create Control Data which lets you insert bend aftertouch or control change data and other commands for delet ing copying inserting or moving tracks can be accessed from the Utility menu command in pages such as SEQ 5 2 Track Edit PG p 75 Pattern editing Using the Utility menu commands of the SEQ 5 1 RPPR Pattern page you can use event editing to mod ify the recorded data or insert new data and execute commands to delete copy or bounce patterns PG p 70 Creating and playing a Cue List A cue list allows you to play multiple songs in succes sion For example you can create a separate song for each portion introduction melody A melody B cho rus and ending of a composition and use the cue list to specify the order of each portion and the number of times that it will be repeated to complete
132. and pressing one of the F1 T1 T9 F8 T8 T16 keys The display will change and the playback of track 2 will also be muted SER LE 1 Play REC Program PLAN MUTE PREC A i 25 iC aus ga OE GE GEO GER GEI Tei Drums Tes corr Fretless Ea IP las REC Jiproa 2fprog tel Mix 2 fnt te JL Prec T KSL To cancel muting press the PLAY MUTE REC and press the DEC key Next select the track 1 SOLO On Off and press the INC key once The display will change and now only the track 1 playback will be heard In this way the Solo func tion lets you hear only a specified track noe If both Mute and Solo are used the Solo function will be given priority SER 1 1 Play REC Program SOLO On Off 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 Reso Hi eoz B ib b Fl Guita Fl strin Forsaga i B020 C027 B097 B10 Caa5 Ca25 nep snc rod rro ero E ron ron T81 Drums T81 Eo020 5tandard kit Choi Ploy REC Prog 2ilProg igll Mix s Totis te Jl Prec I DUNE 69 Basic functions mode 70 Press the track 2 SOLO On Off and press the INC key once The display will change and only the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be heard 001 im 000 Meter d 4 Reso Hi 18 Manu Bass suita Fl serie Florsonl Slow B620 C627 Beg C885 C825 C625 Bad gemmis EE CE CSI GE GEI T81 Drums COz Fretless Bass Flay REC Prog Sra res ESMRL To turn off the Solo function select the SOLO On Off
133. are used to specify the program or combination bank that will be the writing destination etc Front and rear panel 13 SEQ UEN CER SAMPLING If the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed PAUSE lt lt REW FF RP SAMPLING LOCATE REC WRITE START STOP PAUSE key This key pauses playback of a song or cue list the key will light Press the key again to cancel Pause the key will go dark lt lt REW key This key rewinds playback of a song or cue list Rewind will occur when you press the key the key will light This will not operate during recording FF gt gt key This key fast forwards playback of a song or cue list Fast forward will occur when you press the key the key will light This will not operate during record ing LO CATE key This key resets the playback location of a song or cue list to a specified location You can also press this key when stuck notes occur for some reason REC W RITE key When you press this key in Sequencer mode the TR will enter recording ready mode the key will light If you then press the START STOP key recording will start p 81 When you press this key in Program Combination or Global modes a dialog box will appear If you then press the F8 OK key the edited content will be written p 43 45 When you press this key in Sampling mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed and then press the START STOP ke
134. asterFX In 1 1 Play you can select and play combinations You can also do some overall editing and make arpeggia tor settings p 29 33 In 2 1 Ed Basic 7 2 Ed MasterFX you can edit the parameters of the combination that was selected in 1 1 Play How a combination is organized A combination consists of a variety of parameters that can be accessed in 2 1 Ed Basic 7 2 Ed MasterFX The diagram below shows how a combination is struc tured Basic combination editing Banks A B and C of the TR contain a variety of combi nations that use the preloaded programs banks A B C and the preset and preloaded user arpeggio patterns and effects You can edit these combinations to create your own original combinations Original programs using samples multisamples recorded in Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed or loaded into memory in Media mode can also be used in a combination Combinations you edit or create can be written into the 384 combination memory areas of banks A C They can also be saved and managed on SD card in Media mode p 43 46 hotel If a program being edited in Program mode is used in a combination it will sound according to the settings being edited If you wish to save an edited combination in inter nal memory you must write it p 43 Suggestions for editing procedure The parameters of each timbre are set in 2 1 Ed Prog Mix 4 4 MIDI Filter4 and 7
135. ation and AMS refer to PG p 215 Suggestions on using alternate modulation When making settings for alternate modulation think of the effect that you wish to produce what type of modulation will be necessary to produce that effect and what parameter of the oscillator filter or amplifier needs to be controlled Then select a source AMS and set the Intensity If you proceed logically in this way you will achieve the desired effect For example if you want to control a guitar like sound so that it appears to be approaching feedback when the joystick is moved away you will make settings so that the joystick controls filter modulation or the resonance level Auto Song Setup function This function automatically applies the settings of the current program or combination to a new song in the sequencer If inspiration for a phrase or song strikes you while you re playing a program or combination you can use this function to start recording immediately Hold down the ENTER key and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key The Setup to Record dialog box will open and ask Are you sure Press F8 OK key You will automatically enter Sequencer mode and will be in the record ready state Press the START STOP key to start the sequencer and begin recording Combination mode In Combination mode you select play and edit combi nations Combination mode consists of pages 1 1 Play 7 2 Ed M
136. ator Pattern U154CINT Dr HipHop 1 Octave 1 OSort MLatch Okey Sunc z Keuboard Programi P Edit JL arp J MTM Turn on the front panel ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key Lightly press the TIMBRE TRACK key several times at the desired beat The tempo J display in the upper right of the LCD will change accord ing to the playback tempo When you play the keyboard the arpeggiator will play a drum pattern at the specified tempo 120 Lightly press the TIMBRE TRACK key on the beat and slightly shorten the intervals at which you press the key The playback tempo of the drum pattern will speed up slightly A Tap tempo control can be used whenever the TEMPO knob can be operated For example the tempo cannot be controlled while a song is playing in Sequencer mode with Tempo Mode PG p 51 set to Auto noel The tap tempo control function can also be con trolled from a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE FOOT SWITCH jack as well as by the TIMBRE TRACK key PG p 127 Global mode Foot SW Assign Shortcuts MENU key numeric keys 0 9 x2 Access the various pages within each mode Hold down the MENU key and use numeric keys 0 9 to input a two digit page number MENU key 4 gt keys Access the various pages within each mode Hold down the MENU key and use the a gt keys to move TIMBRE TRACK key function keys F1 F8 Access the parameters
137. ave an effect anytime that this pat tern is used in Program Combination or Song 8 In Lgth Length specify the length of the pat tern After the pattern has played for the length specified it will return to the beginning This setting can also be changed during or after editing For this exam ple set it to 8 noe For the preload arpeggio patterns U000 INT U199 INT simply changing the Lgth can sig nificantly change the character of the pattern Try changing the length and listening to the result Make settings for the Tempo Reso Resolu tion Oct Octave Sort Latch K Sync Key Sync and Kbd Keyboard parameters These are program parameters but can be set from here as well If after moving here from Program mode you modify these parameters and wish to keep your changes return to Program mode and write the program These parameters are not saved by Write Arpeggio Pattern For this example make the settings shown in the illustration 3 The Type Arpeggio Type Octave Motion and Fixed Note parameters specify how the arpeggio will be developed These settings can be changed during or after edit ing PG p 138 Select the Edit page GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Edi Setup JL esie Tr A pattern consists of Steps and Tones Step A user arpeggio pattern can have a maximum of 48 steps The arpeggiator will play from the f
138. ayback will be correct note If you wish to trigger the RPPR function from an external MIDI device use the MIDI channel that is selected for Track Select 4 To turn off the RPPR function uncheck the RPPR check box Play RPPR while a song plays back RPPR can be played in synchronization with the play back of a song Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of SEO will synchronize to the playback of the song PG p 73 Sync Start song playback and then press the key The pat tern playback will start in synchronization with the measures of the song Synchronization will be lost if you use the lt lt REW or FF gt gt keys while a song is playing noe If you want RPPR pattern playback to begin at the moment that song playback begins it is a good idea to insert an empty measure containing no musical data before the song playback begins m If the song is stopped the pattern will synchronize to the timing of the arpeggiator function Realtime recording an RPPR perfor mance An RPPR performance can be recorded in realtime If you are using only one track T01 Drums as in Cre ating and recording RPPR p 75 set Track Select to T01 Drums and use single track recording in which only one track will be recorded Even if RPPR uses only one track use multi track recording if you will be selecting another track in Track Select and recording its performance at the same time You
139. be sounded and controlled The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must be set to match the MIDI Channel of TR tracks that are set to EXT EX2 or BTH If Status is set to BTH both the external tone gen erator and the TR s own tone generator will be sounded and controlled If you are using the TR s Sequencer mode as a 16 track multi timbral tone generator set this parame ter to INT or BTH Status PG p 62 In general you should set MIDI Channel to dif ferent channels 1 16 for each track Tracks that are sent to the same MIDI channel will sound simulta neously when either is recorded or played Make effect settings SEQ 7 1 Insert FX SEQ 7 2 Master FX Make settings for each effect in SEO 7 1 Insert FX and SEQ 7 2 Master FX p 114 PG p 84 Set the tempo and time signature SEQ 1 1 Play REC Make these settings in SEQ 1 1 Play REC Tempo sets the tempo and Meter sets the time signature PG p 50 Make other settings as necessary As necessary make arpeggiator settings SEO 6 1 Arp and MIDI filter settings SEQ 4 1 4 4 MIDI Filter 1 4 PG p 49 87 When you are finished making these settings the basic setup is complete Record as described in 3 Record ing the bass track vs p 66 and following sections Song editing methods A song can be edited in a variety of ways Here we will explain various ways in which the song we recorded in the preceding pages can b
140. bserve the guidelines for handling and use Connecting separately sold options By installing the separately sold EXB SMPL option you can add two channels of audio input jacks and a SCSI connector For details on installing the EXB SMPL refer to PG p 260 EXB SMPL AUDIO INPUT iv MIC UNE MAX MIN 2 1 e scsi o amp 9 O i d o o mMm Effect processor etc _r o fem If a passive type guitar a guitar without an internal preamp is connected it will not be possible to L L GU 1 5 8e 20 sample at an appropriate level due to the impedance mismatch Such loo SEBEERE Gece instruments must be connected via a preamp or effect unit CD player analog record player etc 1 Audio input connections Connect a mic or the OUTPUT jacks of an external audio device to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks when you want to sample in Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed or in Program Combination or Sequencer mode when you want to apply an internal effect to an external input sound and output the processed sound from the OUTPUT jacks O For details on connections when sampling in Sam pling mode refer to p 35 O For details on connections when applying an effect in other modes and outputting to the OUT PUT jacks refer to p 115 2 SCSI connections You can connect SCSI compatible devices hard disks CD ROM drives etc E
141. by oper ating a controller Use DKit Setting This is valid when Mode Oscillator Mode is set to Drums If this is checked the pan location specified by the Drum Kit for each drum sound will be used If this is unchecked all drum sounds will sound at the same location Preload and GM drum kits are set to stereo settings Normally you will leave this checked Mod page PROG 5 1 Ed fimpi Keyboard Track Mod KBOTrk Key Low Key Low gg 2 Ramp Low 84 Velocity Int 56 AMS AfterT High F 4 High 66 Intensity 488 RMS Off Intensity 00 RMS Off TaJ Un Keyboard Track This lets you vary the volume relative to the position of the key you are playing on the keyboard e When Ramp Low has a positive value the volume will increase as you play lower on the keyboard With a negative value the volume will decrease as you play lower on the keyboard When Ramp High has a positive value the volume will increase as you play higher on the keyboard With a negative value the volume will decrease as you play higher on the keyboard Amp Mod Velocity Int is used by most programs to decrease the volume of softly played notes and increase the vol ume of strongly played notes and this Amp Modula tion parameter adjusts the depth of this control Normally you will set Amp Modulation to positive values As this setting is increased there will be greater volum
142. by using an LFO Low Frequency Oscillator to apply cyclic change to pitch filter or amp you can create changes in the pitch tone or vol ume EG Envelope Generator This instrument provides a Pitch EG Filter EG and Amplifier EG which produce time varying changes in pitch tone and volume respectively note on Attack Level note off Level Break Level Y Release Level Sustain Level gt T Time m Time Slope Time Release Time Attack Time Start Level LFO Low Frequency Oscillator For each oscillator this instrument provides two LFO s that can be used to apply cyclical change in pitch tone and volume Examples of this are vibrato cyclical change in pitch wah cyclical change in tone and tremolo or auto pan cyclical change in volume Filter settings 4 1 Ed Filter1 4 2 Ed Filter2 The filter allows you to diminish or emphasize speci fied frequency areas of the multisample selected for the oscillator The tone of the sound will depend signifi cantly on the filter settings This instrument provides Filter 1 for OSC1 and Filter 2 for OSC2 For each of these filters you can select from two types Low Pass Resonance or Low Pass amp High Pass Filter 2 can be used if Mode Oscillator Mode is set to Double Filter characteristics This area of overtones will be diminished pine Overtones included Overtones after in the original multisample passing through the filter
143. cable if the TR is again displayed as an Unknown device the computer has failed to detect it correctly Delete the Unknown device entry and reinstall the AVET ener a vi oatiiaviniece PG p 265 Your software does not respond to the TR Is the USB cable connected correctly Did you install the driver g Has your computer detected the connected TR If you are using Windows XP go to Control Panel Sounds and Audio Devices Properties and click the Hardware tab E If you are using Mac OS X go to Macintosh HD gt Application folder gt Utility folder Audio MIDI Settings select the MIDI Devices tab and check that the TR has been detected amp Some computers may not recognize the TR because of their hardware configuration Check the TR s assignments and USB MIDI port settings The connected device or software may not support the messages you are transmitting Refer to the owner s manual of the connected device or software to verify that it responds to the messages you are transmitting 123 Specifications and options Specifications System HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system Modes Combination Program Sequencer Global Media Sampling if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed Tone generator HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system Polyphony 62 voices 62 oscillators in single mode 31 voices 62 oscillators in double mode 24 dB oct LPF with resonance 12 dB
144. ck set to Internal sssssseeeeeee xe PG p 129 Can t record in Sequencer mode In the GLOBAL 1 1 System Preference page is the Memory Protect Song check box unchecked PG p 127 e Is the GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI page MIDI Clock set to Internal ssssssseeeee x PG p 129 Arpeggiator does not start Is the ARP ON OFF key turned on lit Ifthe arpeggiator does not start for a combination or song make sure that Arpeggiator Run is checked and that an arpeggiator is selected for ASSISI S rino eS Bi Ours cere vs p 29 PG p 35 82 e Is the GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Clock parameter set to Internal ssssseeeee xe PG p 129 Ifthe ARP ON OFF key does not respond in GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern you may have moved here from Sampling mode or Media mode No sound when the AUDIITO N key is turned on The Audition function is available only in Program mode e If no sound is played when you turn on the AUDITION key in Program mode make sure that the PROG 2 1 Ed Basic Audition page parameter Audition Riff has not been turned Off If no sound is played when you turn on the AUDITION key in Sampling mode check the following points Is a sample correctly assigned to the currently selected Index Are the S Start LpS Loop Start and E End address settings correct xe PG p 109
145. create and insert controller data that changes smoothly between two specified values over the specified length of time This is used to input bend after touch and control change data etc Realtime recording to a pattern Here s how you can use realtime recording to create a pattern User patterns can be accessed by the RPPR function in the same way as preset patterns and can be copied to or placed in a song Playback data from a track can also be copied to a pattern A Before you begin recording a pattern turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode p 43 When realtime recording a pattern a pattern of the specified number of measures will playback repeat edly allowing you to continue adding musical data to it D Create a new song and load the template song P02 R amp B p 65 Access the SEQ 5 1 RPPR Pattern page SER 5 1 RPPR Song 666 R amp B Pattern Pattern Select i CO59 E Basz Finger Pattern ser Resolution um MEX For Track Select select track T02 Bass 2 Set Pattern Bank to User and set Pattern Select to U00 User patterns U00 U99 can be created for each song Select the Utility menu command Pattern Param Event Edit A dialog box will appear Set Pattern Parameter of U00 Meter 4 4 6 Set the number of measures in the pattern to a Length of 04 four measures and set Meter to a time signature of 4 4 Press the F8 OK
146. cute the Utility menu command Copy From Combination A dialog box will appear Copy from Combination Combi B099 Steely Keys I with Effects To Tracki to Select the combination that you want to copy i e the copy source Press the COMBI BANK B key then press numeric keys 9 9 and finally press the ENTER key B099 Steely Keys will be selected We will copy the effect settings of the combination as well so check the With Effects check box Since we want to copy the settings of the combina tion s eight timbres to tracks 1 8 select Track 1 to 8 Press the F8 OK key to execute the copy In the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page check the Multi REC check box p 77 B0S6 Metalic hea Tas RECN Prog 2 Prog tel Mine Wintel Pres J MLD T61 TRACK 61 T81 When you perform multi track recording the multi ple channels that are being sounded by the arpeg giator will be recorded simultaneously Set the tracks not being recorded i e tracks 9 16 to PLAY or MUTE p 69 Set Track Select to 01 In order to play the sounds and arpeggiator in the same way as in Combination mode set Track Select to the track that matches the global MIDI channel When you play the keyboard the sounds will be heard just as in Combination mode Begin recording Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 Press the REC WRITE key and then press the
147. d EXB SMPL option is installed These connectors are used to sample mono or stereo audio from a mic or audio device p 35 39 or to use the internal effect processor to apply effects p 115 The MIC LINE level select switch MIC LINE switch and the level adjustment knob LEVEL knob allow a wide range of audio sources to be input from mic level to line level SCSI connector Use a SCSI cable to connect this to a SCSI compatible device hard disk drive CD ROM drive etc EXB SMPL owner s manual AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks These are unbalanced phone audio input jacks p 14 Connect them to the OUTPUT jack s of your external audio device or mic LEVEL knob This knob adjusts the input level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks p 35 MIC LINE switch This switch selects the input level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks p 35 Front and rear panel O bjects and functions in the LCD screen a Current page d Edit cell e Check box COMBI 1 1 Plau Arp Plav ff Combi Select 000 fimp Driven Wura Arpeggiator Run IA Um T IET SORE THE C ENDO frpe3aiator B Bttern Paaa UP sort OLatch Okey Sunc Keyboard Leo JL Prog Tots JL arp aLarpey VW c Parameter b Tab f Function buttons a Current page This indicates the currently selected page within the mode From the left this area shows the mode name page number name tab name and the parameter name of the edit cell Parameter name
148. d Sequencer mode the TR provides dual arpeggiators that can simultaneously play two arpeggio patterns You can apply separate arpeggio patterns to drum and bass programs or use keyboard splits or velocity to switch between arpeggio patterns for an even more dynamic perfor mance 4 channel audio output In addition to the L MONO and R main stereo audio outputs TR provides two individual audio outputs for a total of four channels of audio output The sound from each oscillator drum timbre track or insertion effect can be routed freely to any output EXB SMPL sampling upgrade The following functionality can be added by installing the separately sold EXB SMPL option e Sampling mode is added Input sources from the two channel audio inputs can be sampled and edited to create original multisamples or samples which can then be used in a program or drum kit For details on the features of Sampling mode refer to p 86 Two channel audio input is added This two channel audio input allows 48 kHz 16 bit linear mono stereo sampling A MIC or LINE level select switch and level adjustment control supports a wide range of external audio sources from mic level to line level The audio input can also be routed to the effects You can apply an effect while sampling or use the TR as a 2 in 4 out effect processor e A SCSI connector is added allowing external SCSI devices such as hard disks to be connected A connected external SC
149. d as shown in line 2 With a setting of Hi the performance will be recorded with the exact timing at which it was played 001 HER UU Meter d 4 E 4 188 Manu 000 Acid Jazz CORPPR T82 cOzT Fretiess Bass Cho There is also a Quantize function SEQ 5 2 Track Edit Utility menu command which corrects the tim ing of performance data after it has been input If you have already recorded without using realtime quantize and later notice during playback that the timing is not quite right as in line 1 of the preceding diagram you can select the SEQ 5 2 Track Edit Utility menu command Quantize set Resolu tion to J and press the F8 OK key to correct the timing as shown in line 2 Press the REC WRITE key You will hear the metronome The TR will be in record ready mode vs Refer to PG p 57 for details on metronome settings Press the START STOP key After a two measure count recording will begin Play the keyboard for about 16 measures and record your performance If you make a mistake or decide to re record press the START STOP key to stop recording and press the COMPARE key When you press the COMPARE key to execute the Compare function you will return to the state prior to recording Refer to p 80 for the content that can be compared in Sequencer mode 6 When you are satisfied with your performance press the START STOP key to stop recording nole For example i
150. d play ing the desired note 109 settings Basic functions Arpeggi Select the Edit page Each Tone in the display will be shown as a small circle For each horizontal line Tone in the display you will specify a drumsample note number of the drum kit Next we will input a rhythm pattern Input the kick Tone00 Set Step Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Then set Step Step No to 05 and press the 0 key Input the snare Tone01 Set Step Step No to 03 and press the 1 key Then set Step Step No to 07 and press the 1 key Input the closed hi hat Tone02 Set Step Step No to 01 02 03 05 06 and 07 and press the 2 key for each Input the open hi hat Tone03 Set Step Step No to 04 and press the 3 key Then set Step Step No to 08 and press the 3 Lm Ei Tl If Mode Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger All Tones playing a single note on the keyboard will cause the rhythm pattern to play If Mode Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger As Played playing a single note on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 to play Playing two notes on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 and snare Tone01 to play In this way the number of keys that you play will be played by the same number of tones Set the parameters for each step Use Vel Velocity
151. d the right will strengthen the velocity 4 TEMPO Controls the tempo of the arpeggiator or of the Sequencer mode The LED beside TEMPO will blink at quarter note intervals of the specified tempo 6 Mode keys COMPARE key CI 55 These keys are used to enter each mode Pressing a key will enter the corresponding mode the key will light p 15 CO MBI key Combination mode will be selected PRO G key Program mode will be selected SEQ key Sequencer mode will be selected G LO BAL key Global mode will be selected MEDIA key Media mode will be selected CO MPARE key Use this key when you wish to compare the sound of the program or combination that you are currently editing with the un edited sound that was written into memory You can also use this key to make before and after comparisons when recording or editing in Sequencer mode p 16 SAMPLIN G EXB SMPL key This key selects the Sampling mode This is valid only if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed A If the separately sold EXB SMPL option is not installed pressing the SAMPLING key will cause a message of No Sampling Upgrade Installed to be displayed 7 TIMBRE TRACK key F1 T1 T9 F8 T8 T16 keys TIMBRE TRACK Fl F2 F3 F4 F F7 F8 IL JT JT JT JT rar TI T9 72 T10 13 711 T4 T12 T5 T13 T Tl4 T T5 18 T16 Function F1 F8 keys These keys select the
152. data in a track Check Program and Seq Event Program D072 Seq Event Track Song 000 Track 01 Meter 4 4 Start Measure 001 Times 008 Save Smpl MS Beat a64 Stretch Ratio 100 00 DEREN Sre BPM 120 New BPM 120 vith Program 0672 InitiProgramDa72 Seq Event Song 668 Track T 1 Meter d d Track Start Measure 661 i Press the F8 Save key to save your settings You will return to the dialog box of step To create performance data in a pattern In order to insert the data into a pattern press the F6 Save key once again to access the Save Smpl MS dialog box Check Program and Seq Event Program D073 Basic functions Sampling mode 95 96 Seq Event Pattern Song 001 Pattern U00 Meter 4 4 RPPR On checked Key C22 Track 01 Save Smpl MS Beat a04 Stretch Ratio 100 00 E OPE SrcBPM 120 NEW BPM 126 th Program 0973 InitIProgramD8 75 Ir Seq Event Song 461 Pattern U66 Meter 4 id E batan Pattern GIRPPR Key c 2 Track ENE index Sourcecc2 Estren temesi Leme Press the F8 Save key to save your settings You will return to the dialog box of step Press the F7 Exit key to return to the screen of step Press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode and set Song Select to 000 The song data that you specified in step 7 has been automatically set created as shown below SEO 1 1 Play RE
153. data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data D Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record Set the Recording Mode to Auto Punch In SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page REC Setup 001 01 OU Meter 4 d Reso Hi REC Setup Auto Punch In Fe 183 Manu moos GEER st Mess yee Gets Mutti REC Precount 2 Level 127 BUS L R IFias REGI IPro 3 TET SET Ss 8 Iti 16 Jl ere TEA In Auto P Start Meas Auto P End Meas specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M005 M008 recording will occur only from measure 5 to measure 8 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key When you reach the starting location you specified in step recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you reach the ending loca tion you specified in step recording will end Playback will continue Press the START STOP key Playback will stop and you will return to the loca tion you specified in step Loop All Tracks This method lets you continue recording as you add musical data The specified region can be recorded repeatedly This is ideal when recording drum phrases etc D Use Track Select to select the track that yo
154. de can also be saved Simple combination editing A combination is a set of multiple up to eight pro grams and allows you to create complex sounds that could not be produced by a single program Combination editing refers to the process of modify ing the sound of a combination by changing the pro gram selected for each timbre or adjusting the keyboard range and velocity range or by modifying the controller and effect settings You can edit a combination in COMBI 2 1 Ed Prog Mix 7 2 Ed MasterFX but can also make settings for Program Select Pan and Volume in COMBI 1 1 Play as well An example of editing As an example here s how to do some simple editing on combination Bank C064 Modern Piano CD Press the COMBI key the key will light to enter Combination mode Q Select Bank C064 Modern Piano This combination layers simultaneously sounds the programs of timbre 1 and timbre 2 Timbre 1 sounds C001 Attack Piano a piano with a crisp attack Timbre 2 sounds D017 Vintage EP a classic electric piano These two programs are layered to produce a piano type sound that you may have heard in various contexts Ed A timbre consists a of program together with mul tiple parameters that control that program A com bination can use up to eight of these timbres Selecting the program for a timbre Select the Prog page Press the F2 Prog key Now you can specify the programs for timbres 1 8
155. ded data you can use the Event Edit function PG p 75 7 Using controllers to record tonal changes Let s try using the realtime controllers and the joystick to add effects to the performance that we just step recorded on track 8 Press the EXIT key and then press the F6 Pref key to move to the SEQ 1 1 Play Rec Preference page Set the Recording Mode to Over Dub Over Dub allows you to add to a previously recorded track ds 18 Manu 001 Of 00 Meter d 4 Resot REC Setup VIACOEEMN biR ie Ment pie Mant OMutlti REC TOS E4zEzprezz Lead e E E EN ere T For Track Select make sure that T08 Lead Synth is selected Press the START STOP key to start playback and operate the realtime controllers and joystick to rehearse When you are finished rehearsing press the START STOP key to stop Press the LOCATE key Start recording Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key After a two measure count in recording will begin Operate the LFO CUTOFF or RESONANCE HPF realtime controllers or the joystick Y axis to record their movements When you are finished performing press the START STOP key If you make a mistake or want to re record press the COMPARE key to execute the Compare func tion and then re record 8 Saving the song Remember to save the song you created The data will be lost when the power of the TR is turned off Re
156. e L or R Specify the start address in S Start the loop start address in LpS Loop Start and the end address in E End Select S Start highlighted and use the VALUE dial or other VALUE controllers to modify the value The corresponding vertical line will move Set LpS Loop Start and E End in the same way In the example shown below S Start is set immediately before the first waveform LpS Loop Start is set immediately before the second waveform and E End is set as desired S Start LpS Loop Start E End EN By using the ZOOM F4 key F7 key you can change the range that is displayed When S Start is highlighted zoom will be performed from the start address PG p 101 SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit2 start S Editt Ml editz EAIN P EIE Ee IN LUTT EN If the Zero Use Zero check box is checked only those addresses where the waveform data crosses the zero level will be found automatically when searching and can be set This lets you eas ily make address settings where noise is less likely to occur when looping If necessary use the Utility menu command Truncate to delete unwanted data that falls out side the start or loop start and end addresses Truncate Sample 0001 Range Start 881178 End 8822124 Truncate TTE Save to No 8802 C overuwrite Set the parameters and press the F8 OK key to execute the operati
157. e is Enable respectively 1 When GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI Clock is Internal transmitted but not received The opposite for External or Ext USB 2 LSB MSB 02 00 Arpeggiator ON OFF 0A 00 Arpeggiator Gate control 0B 00 Arpeggiator Velocity control 3 LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch bend range 01 00 Fine tune 02 00 Coarse tune 4 In addition to Korg exclusive messages Inquiry GM System On Master Volume Master Balance Master Fine Tune and Master Coarse Tune are supported Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION O Yes x No Numerics 10 s HOLD tres 22 A ADC OVERI eereeeee 35 39 After Touch sss 26 After touch curve 118 Alternate Modulation 1 24 56 63 Amp EG ssrin 54 Amplifier eterne 54 Arpeggiator srini 27 63 ASSIBTE echtes 105 Galle M 6 Key S NG ainina 29 Length of each note 28 104 Length of the arpeggio note 108 Link Combination 106 Link Program 105 Octave usns nicis 104 on off sesssssss 27 103 105 Orderazisssusu ug US 104 RANPE eisenii 104 105 Strength of notes 28 Synchronization 111 TenipO eee aeneis 6 28 105 blue 104 Velocity iieri 6 104 Arpeggio pattern 103
158. e lag when cue list playback is started or when switching from song to song Although it will not be possible to change effect types within the cue list you can use dynamic modulation or MIDI control changes such as Effect Control to control the effects within the cue list for example applying reverb more deeply on certain songs or raising the LFO speed for a specific song We recommend this method if you will be using a cue list to construct the song When you execute the Utility menu command Con vert to Song the effect settings of the Step 01 song will be specified for the song that results from the con version Even if FX is not checked there may be cases in which a time lag in the transition between songs depending on the musical data of the song Also there may be cases in which the musical data is not played at the correct timing at the transition between songs If this occurs you can edit the musical data of the song or convert the cue list to a song for playback If you use Convert to Song to convert the cue list to a song there will be no time lag during playback at the transi tion between songs and the musical data will be played at the correct timing Creating multiple songs for use in a cue list If you want to create multiple songs for use in a cue list itis a good idea to make the various necessary set tings program and other settings for each track effect settings etc for one song e g S00
159. e If you are in the SMPL 2 1 Sample Edit Edit2 page are the S Edit Range Start and E Edit Range End settings correct sssssss xe PG p 100 122 RPPR does not start e Is the SEQ 1 1 Play REC RPPR setting checked ae es PG p 51 Are Assign Pattern Select and Track set cortectly isikia p 75 PG p 73 e If the GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Clock parameter set to Internal ssseeeee i PG p 129 You converted GM GS XG format SMF data and played itin Sequencer mode but it does not sound correctly Execute GM Initialize to initialize the settings TROC EAAS A T A PEPEE EE TE E PG p 54 Is GLOBAL 1 1 System Preference page Bank Map setto GM eno v PG p 126 Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH is p 70 PG p 62 Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed e Make sure that the PROG 2 1 Ed Basic Prog Basic page Mode Oscillator Mode parameter is set to Do ble inse ij p 51 PG p 5 Data is not transmitted from the MIDI O UT connec tor If MIDI data is being transmitted from the TR via USB to your computer transmission from the MIDI OUT connector is halted If the USB connection is broken transmission from the MIDI OUT connector will resume This instrument does not respond to incoming MIDI data Are all MIDI cables connected correctly ee err e c E aUe is p
160. e Modulation Source is operated For exam ple if AMS is set to AfterT applying pressure to the keyboard of the TR will apply a wah effect EG page Indicates settings for the filter EG which controls time variant changes in tone PG p 16 Make settings for the EG here and set the depth of its effect in the Mod 1 page Filter EG parameter Filter EG and Amplifier EG When the Filter EG changes the cutoff frequency the tone will change However depending on the volume changes produced by the Amplifier EG this can be heard in different ways For example by changing the speed at which the tone and volume begin attack or decay you can significantly vary the character of the tonal change It is a good idea to adjust the changes of both the Filter EG tone and the Amplifier EG vol ume as you proceed with editing 5 1 Ed Ampl EG page 5 2 Ed Amp2 EG page Amplifier settings 5 1 Ed Amp1 5 2 Ed Amp2 These settings affect the volume Here you can adjust the way in which the Amp EG and LFO produce time varying and cyclic changes in volume and how the controllers etc will affect the volume Ampl applies to OSC1 and Amp2 applies to OSC2 Amp 2 can be used if Mode Oscillator Mode is set to Double For example the volume of a piano note begins at a high volume the instant you play the note and then decreases gradually The volume of an organ note remains constant as long as you continue pres
161. e Off Velocity O 9n V 0 127 O 9n V 0 127 Aftertouch Polyphonic Key Monophonic Channel Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted only as sequence data Pitch Bend 64 65 66 67 70 79 80 81 82 83 93 91 92 94 95 6 38 96 97 98 99 100 101 0 95 0 101 120 121 Control Change XOOXOXOOOOOOOOO O0 OO X OOOOOOOOOOOOO0O00 0 OO X Bank Select MSB LSB Joystick Y Y Pedal Portamento Time Volume IFX pan Pan Expression Effect Control 1 2 Damper Portamento Sw Sostenuto Soft C Sound Realtime Controls 1 4A 74 71 79 72 C Switch 1 2 Foot Switch Controller C Send 1 2 Effect ON OFF IFX MFX1 MFX2 C Data Entry MSB LSB C Data Increment Decrement C NRPN LSB MSB C 2 RPN LSB MSB C 73 Realtime Controls knobs 1 4 B assign C Sequencer data receive C All Sound Off Reset All Controllers C Program Change Variable Range O 0 127 2 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K ok P System Exclusive E 4 Song Position Song Select Tune System Common When cue list is selected corresponds to cue list 1 When cue list is selected corresponds to cue lists 0 19 1 Clock Command System Real Time 1 1 Local On Off All Notes Off Active Sense Reset Aux Messages O 123 127 O X Notes P A C E Transmitted received when GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI Filter Program Change After Touch Control Change Exclusiv
162. e difference between softly played and strongly played notes LFO 1 Mod LFO2 Mod Specify how the LFO s will produce cyclic changes in volume the tremolo effect The volume will be affected by the LFO s for which you set an Intensity LFO1 Intensity LFO2 Intensity value Int AMS Intensity adjusts the depth by which the tremolo effect produced by the LFO will be affected when you operate an AMS LFO1 AMS LFO2 AMS For example if you set AMS to JS Y 02 tremolo will be applied when you move the joystick of this instru ment toward yourself or when CC 02 is received EG page Here you can make settings for the amp EG which changes the volume over time Every instrument has its own characteristic curve of volume change This is part of what gives each instru ment its identifiable character Conversely by applying a strings type Amp EG curve to an organ type multi sample you can produce a sound with a character unlike a typical organ Piano Organ Strings gt NS Pa LFO settings 5 3 Ed LFO s For each oscillator you can use two LFO Low Fre quency Oscillator units LFO1 and LFO2 You are free to select the type of each LFO and set its speed The depth of the LFO1 and LFO2 that you specify here is adjusted by the settings of the 3 1 Ed Pitch 4 1 Ed Filter1 4 2 Ed Filter2 5 1 Ed Ampl and 5 2 Ed Amp2 pages 81 lostLrFotfltLFo2 lztrotllztr
163. e edited for the purpose of creating a Cue List explained in the section that fol lows 1 Copying a song Here s how to copy a song This is convenient when you want to create different variations based on a song D Create a new song Press the EXIT key to display the SEO 1 1 Play REC page Choose Song Select use the numeric keys to input the song number that you want to newly cre ate and press the ENTER key For example press the 1 key and then the ENTER key A dialog box will appear Create new song this song Ho Set Length Rre you sure Decide on the number of measures input the num ber in Set Length and press the F8 OK key REC Song Select 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 Reso Hi 001 NEW SONG 47128 Manu ORPPR T81 TRACK 61 T81 _A000 big sweep Stob Choi Eloy RECN Frog 2IProg tellin Win te i Pres A Anew song will be created Next we will copy the song settings and playback data of another song into this newly created song Select the Utility menu command Copy From Song and press the F8 OK key From Combi Copy Song From TIHGISCEER A dialog box will appear Select the song that you want to copy i e the copy source If you select All all song settings and playback data will be copied from that song If you select Without Track Pattern Events settings other than Play Loop and RPPR will be copied For this example select All
164. e function key F1 F7 or cursor keys La 4 v gt to select the desired page and press the F8 key to move to the selected page You can also move to a desired page by holding down the MENU key and using numeric keys 1 7 to enter a two digit page number In addition you can hold down the MENU key and use cursor keys a gt to switch pages in the order of 1 132 12 22 3 p 15 CURSOR keys 4 7 gt Use these keys to select different parameters on screen In addition you can hold down the MENU key and use cursor keys a gt to switch pages in the order of 1 132 12 22 3 p 15 12 BANK keys These keys are used to switch Program Combination banks PROG BANK COMBI BANK PROG BANK A B C D GM When selecting programs use keys A B C D and GM The key of the selected bank will light Each time you press GM you will cycle through the GM banks and the drum bank as follows G g d G etc COMBI BANK A B C When selecting combinations use keys A B and C The LED of the selected bank will light In Combination and Sequencer modes when the edit cell highlighted area is located at the program of a timbre or track you can use the BANK keys to select the bank of the program The bank key of the program selected for that timbre track will light In dialog boxes such as Write Program or Write Com bination these keys
165. e manual included with the EXB SMPL and make sure that the external SCSI device is connected correctly You will also need to format the media if necessary PG p 156 2 Press the MEDIA key to enter Media mode 3 Press the F2 Save key to access the Save page tS Pi U Jae informali If the media contains directories select the direc tory in which you want to save the data To move to a lower level press the F6 OPEN key To move to a higher level press the F5 UP key Select the Utility menu command Save All Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the Utility menu Press the F7 key to select Save All and then press the F8 OK key A dialog box will appear The contents settings and operations for the dialog box will depend on the type of data that you are saving For details refer to PG p 152 Save All PCG SHG and KSC NEWFILE PCG SNG KSC 6 Press the F5 Name key to display the text dia log box and input the desired name r p 44 7 Use the check boxes to uncheck items that you do not want to save In order to accurately reproduce the data you cre ated we recommend that you check all of the boxes Press the F8 OK key to execute the Save oper ation The data will be saved to the SD card and you will return to the Save page The time required to save the information will depend on the amount of data
166. e media If the EXB SMPL option sold separately is installed the TR can save data on external SCSI media maxi mum 4 GB such as a hard disk Zip Jaz ORB or MO drive When the EXB SMPL option is installed an external SCSI device of up to 4 GB can be formatted noe When you insert media for the first time after turn ing on the power or after changing disks you must press a function key etc to make the TR detect the media When the disk or other media is recognized media information will appear in the LCD screen noe If more than one volume of media is currently rec ognized select Media and use the INC DEC keys to switch between media A The TR cannot format media with a format of other than 512 bytes block such as 640 MB 1 3 GB MO disks etc Formatting media SD card or external SCSI media via the EXB SMPL option must be formatted Newly purchased media or media that has been used by another device cannot be used immediately on the TR It must first be formatted for use on the TR The TR supports MS DOS format 100 For the formatting procedure refer to Format vx PG p 156 Media must be formatted SD cards or external SCSI media that was formatted on a device other than the TR may not be recognized correctly A It is not possible to format media of other than 512 bytes per block e g 640 Mbyte or 1 3 Gbyte MO disks SD card handling TheSD card may be hot immediately
167. e right Programs PROG 1 1 7 2 Utility Write Program Combinations COMBI 1 1 7 2 Utility Write Combination Song SEQ 1 1 4 4 6 1 Utility Rename Song Cue list SEQ 2 1 Utility Rename Cue List Tracks SEQ 5 1 5 2 Utility Rename Track The following input operations can also be performed 0 9 and can be input using the numeric keys When you input these the cursor will advance automatically By pressing the ENTER key at the space blank you can input the selected text before the space Patterns SEQ 5 1 Utility Rename Pattern Multisamples SMPL 1 1 4 1 5 2 Utility Rename MS Samples SMPL 1 1 4 1 5 2 Utility Rename SMPL Drum kits GLOBAL 5 1 Utility Rename Drum Kit User arpeggio patterns GLOBAL 6 1 Utility Rename Arpeggio Pattern Program categories GLOBAL 4 1 TEXT Combination categories GLOBAL 4 1 TEXT File MEDIA Save Utility Save All Save Exclusive If the EXB SMPL option is installed Open the text dialog box Refer to the above table for the relevant page In the Utility menu commands press Name the F5 key in the dialog box that appears In GLOBAL 4 1 select TEXT press the F5 key About the Edit Buffer When you select a program or combination in PROG 1 1 Play and COMBI 1 1 Play the program or combi nation data is called into the edit buffer When you modify the parameters in 1 1 Play or in the Edit pages
168. e volume of the notes more consistent even when they are played with vary ing velocities dynamics Each curve has its own char acter so you can select the curve that is appropriate for your own playing dynamics playing style and the effect that you wish to obtain r PG p 124 D Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode Press the EXIT key 3 Press the F1 Basic key To change the velocity curve select Velocity Curve and specify the desired curve To change the after touch curve select AfterT Curve and specify the desired curve If you wish to keep this setting after the power is y P g P turned off you must Write the Global settings to memory rp 45 nole This setting will affect the operation of the entire this instrument nofe Each program has parameters that allow you to adjust the effect of velocity playing dynamics and the change will depend on the settings of these parameters These parameters can be indi vidually set in detail in Program mode 118 Creating original scales You can create your own original scales You can create sixteen different User Octave Scales in which the pitch of each note in the octave is repeated for all octaves and one User All Note Scale in which the pitch of each of the 128 notes can be specified independently m If you wish to keep this setting after the power is turned off you must Write the Global settings to memory i p 45 The user scale
169. eats p 35 s the LEVEL knob raised is p 35 e Is the MIC LINE switch set appropriately v amp p 35 e If there is no sound in Sampling mode go to SMPL 1 1 Recording select the Input Pref page and make sure that Lvl and BUS are set correctly i p 35 PG p 95 e If there is no sound in Program Combination or Sequencer modes go to GLOBAL 1 1 System select the Audio In page and make sure that Inputl Level Input1 BUS Select Input2 Level and Input2 BUS Select are set correctly i p 115 PG p 128 If sound is still not input even after you have set Input 1 Level Input 2 BUS Select Input 2 Level and Input 2 BUS Select in the GLOBAL 1 1 System Audio In page temporarily lower the Input 1 Level and Input 2 Level and then move to Program Combination or Sequencer mode Turn return to Global mode and make the settings once again siisii pesasse i p 115 Cannot record a sample Areone or more SIMM modules installed pigs EHE EU tatus vs PG p 260 Is there free memory area ssse PG p 120 Select a different memory bank is PG p 92 Delete unneeded samples is PG p 96 Save important samples before deleting them AP E E vs PG p 96 153 The TR does not recognize when MO media has been exchanged and does not correctly display the media information after the exchange
170. ed into sixteen categories You can choose a category and then select from the combina tions in that category p 22 Selecting programs by category Using 10 s HOLD to select combinations You can fix the ten s place of the combination number so that a combination can be selected simply by press ing a numeric key once to change the one s place p 22 Using 10 s HOLD to select programs Using a connected switch to select combinations A separately sold on off type foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 can be connected to the rear panel ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH jack and used to select combinations p 117 Selecting combinations from a MIDI device MIDI program change messages can be transmitted from an external MIDI device and received by this instrument to select combinations PG p 234 23 Quick Start Seleding and playing a combination 24 Using controllers to modify the sound The TR provides various controllers a joystick the SW1 and SW2 switches and the REALTIME CON TROL 1 2 3 4 knobs that let you modify the tone pitch volume or effects in realtime while you play Each time you select a program or combination try out these controllers to hear how they affect the sound m Tonal changes etc created using these controllers can be recorded on the internal sequencer or on an external MIDI sequencer Joystick JS X Move the joystick toward the right to a
171. eggiator function settings etc selected for a song as a template song use the Util ity menu command Save Template Song Immediately after the power is turned on this instrument will not contain any cue list data or song data so if you wish to playback a song on the sequencer you must first load data from external media SD card etc or receive a MIDI data dump from an external MIDI sequencer p 42 101 PG p 146 Features of the sequencer The sequencer lets you record a maximum of 200 000 events note data etc up to 200 songs and as many as 999 measures per song Up to 20 cue lists can be created A cue list is an arrangement of up to 99 songs that will be played as a chain You can specify the num ber of times that each song will repeat Songs in a cue list can also be converted into a single song The arpeggiator function can be used for playback or recording The RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function can be used for playback or recording Sixteen different template songs are built in and contain program and effect settings suitable for various musical styles Up to sixteen original templates that you create can be saved as user template songs Onestereo insertion effect two master effects and a stereo master EQ can be used for each song Timing resolution is a maximum of 4 192 Sixteen tracks are provided for musical data and a master track contains time signature and tempo data
172. elect S001 VERSES In the same way select Step 03 and press the F4 INSERT key to add a song to Step 03 Set this step to 002 CHORUS If you press F5 CUT the selected step will be deleted If you press the F4 INSERT key that step will be inserted If you press the F6 COPY key the selected step will be copied If you press the F4 INSERT key that step will be inserted Set the last step to End If you set this to Continue to Step01 the cue list will play back repeatedly In Rep Repeat specify the number of times that the song for that step will be repeated For this example set Step 02 S001 VERSES to 02 Specify whether effect settings will also be switched when the song at each step is played back If you want to effect settings to change check the FX check box For this example check the FX check box for Step 01 which loads the effects D When you are finished making settings for each step press the F7 DONE key To play back at the tempo that was specified for each song set Tempo Mode to Auto If this is set to Manu Manual playback will use the tempo specified by J Tempo Mode rat M666 1 5666 INTRO 62 M6669 5661 VERSES 85 M88251 5882 CHORUS E Rep Repeat FX When you press the START STOP key playback will begin from the step that is specified as the Current Step Track foot 1
173. elect the desired insert effect note You can use the Utility Select by Category to select effects from six categories In On Off turn the insert effect on off If this is set to Off the result will be the same as if 00 No Effect is selected The input sound will be output without change note You can use the Utility Copy Insert Effect to copy effect settings from another program etc Set the Pan CC 8 BUS Select S1 Send1 MEX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 parameters that follow the insert effect Pan CC 8 Set the pan This is valid only if BUS Select is set to L R BUS Select Specify the output destination Nor mally you will set this to L R If you want to output the sound from AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 and or 2 set this to 1 2 or 1 2 Send1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 Set the send level to the master effects For this example set these to 127 Move to the IFX page and set the parameters of the effect that you selected for the insert effect For details on the parameters of each effect refer to PG p 168 Master effects The input level of the master effect is determined by the send level 1 and 2 settings routing step 3 or insert effect step If send levels 1 and 2 are 0 no master effects will be applied Send level 1 is for MFXI and send level 2 is for MFX2 D Select the PROG 7 2 Ed MasterFX Setup page PROG 7 2 Ed MasterFX
174. elected page and that page will appear As an example here press the F3 key three times to select KeyZ and then press the F8 Open key The 3 3 Ed Key Zone page will appear COMBI 3 3 Ed Ke Key Top Key EE UUU DRELLLELLELL ELL ELLLELLELL RELL ELGG OLLELGAELLEGLL ELL ELGLELLELLGOLL ELL RELL OLE sb E orum CH hotel You can also use the following alternative methods to select a page Press the MENU key and then use the 4 gt keys to move forward or backward through the pages in the order of 1 12 1 2 23 1 etc Hold down the MENU key and use numeric keys 1 7 to enter a two digit page number to move directly to the corresponding page To select the page shown above you would press 3 3 If only one page is assigned to each function key group as in COMBI 1 1 Play or the pages of Global mode the first digit of the numeric key 1 7 will move to the corresponding page The page selected at this time will be the page that was last selected If there is no corresponding page nothing will happen hotel When you press the EXIT key you will return to 1 1 from any page Basic operation 15 16 Selecting a tab Press the function key F1 F7 that is nearest the tab displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen As an example we will select the Slope tab Press the F3 key D lewe Eee E Some pages have no tabs 6 To move to anot
175. emory already contains sam ples use SMPL Sample Select to select the sample and assign it Sampling mode If you want to record a new sample you can sam ple it now The sample you record will be automatically assigned to the index you selected in step For the sampling procedure refer to Manual sam pling or Auto sampling The assigned sample will sound when you play the keyboard in the range of the index to which the sample is assigned or when you press the AUDI TION key Repeat steps 4 and to assign a sample to each index hotel The number and order of the indexes in a multi sample the range of each index and the original key position can be freely changed later if desired p 94 Multisample editing Creating multiple samples In the example procedure described above several indexes were created by pressing the F6 CRE ATE key several times and then samples were assigned to each Index As an alternative method it is also possible to create one index sample into it and then repeat these two steps Press the F6 CREATE key once to create an index 2 Record a sample 91 92 The recorded sample will automatically be assigned to the index you created in step 1 Repeat steps D and This is an efficient way to record multiple samples p 36 Loop settings With the default settings after the power is turned o
176. enu commands other than those listed above in Operations for which Compare is available Memory Protect Before you record a track or pattern or edit the musical data you will need to turn off the memory protect set ting in Global mode r p 43 About MIDI Track status status You can make settings for this instrument s sequencer to specify whether it will sound the internal tone gen erator or an external tone generator When Track Status Status 3 1 Param1 MIDI 8 MIDI 16 is set to INT operating this instrument s keyboard and controllers will sound and control this instrument s own tone generator When Status is set to EXT EX2 or BTH operating this instrument s keyboard and controllers will sound and control the external tone generator The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must match the MIDI Channel of the track that is set to EXT EX2 or BTH With a setting of BTH both the external tone generator and this instrument s tone generator will sound and be controlled Lani Moel osea osca l Fte atena OA If you wish to use the Sequencer mode of the instru ment as a 16 track multi timbral tone generator select INT or BTH PG p 62 Status Synchronizing the sequencer with an external MIDI device The record playback tempo of this instrument s sequencer can be synchronized to an external MIDI device such as a sequencer or rhythm machine v PG p 222 Recording on the TR
177. equencer TR provides a high performance 16 track MIDI sequencer with more than sufficient power for use as a stand alone sequencer The sequencer can serve as the core that brings together TR s numerous capabilities allowing it to serve as an integrated music worksta tion For more on TR s sequencer p 63 RPPR TR features a RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record ing function In Sequencer mode this function allows you to assign preset patterns or user patterns with a specified play back track to individual keys on the keyboard and playback or record that pattern in realtime simply by pressing the assigned key Numerous preset patterns including patterns ideal for drum tracks are built into the internal memory Dual polyphonic arpeggiator Five preset arpeggio patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 RANDOM and 216 user arpeggio patterns are provided With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of preset user patterns In addition to providing conventional arpeggiator functionality the polyphonic arpeggiator of the TR can respond to the pitches or timing at which you play the keyboard and produce a diverse range of chords or phrases This can be used to play a variety of drum phrases using the Fixed Note Mode that is ideal for drums bass phrases or guitar and key board backing riffs The arpeggiator is also effective for use with subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects In Combination mode an
178. er to the manual included with the EXB SMPL and verify that the external SCSI device is connected cor rectly and that the media contains the file you want to load E 7E rSn 1 program i DOSfile 1 combination me r8 EXL file 74m m nm All drum kits 1 drum kit group INT User 5 ala me ram 1 drum kit KMP file KAI format program file ie Otis on rs eB All user arpeggio 1 user arpeggio patterns pattern group INT User lcin Global settings 5 QUT Cue list m 1 song 000 199 SNG file 1 user pattern 00 99 1 user arpeggio pattern l r5 m KSC file H AKAI format sample file me a AIF file 5 ET WAV file ii 0 101 ic functions Media mode 2 Enter Media mode and press any function key to make the TR recognize the media Select the Load page The LCD screen will display file information If you are loading from an external SCSI device use the INC DEC keys to select the media that contains the data you want to load Use the a Y cursor keys to select a PCG file The selected file will be highlighted If the data you want to load is located in a lower or higher level of the directory structure press the F6 OPEN or F5 UP keys to display the desired data and then select it When you load a PCG file the data in the internal memory of the TR will be overwritten by the data
179. erns or create a new user arpeggio pat tern from an initialized condition Edited user arpeggio patterns can be written to internal memory areas U000 INT U215 User In Media mode they can also be saved on external media such as an SD card p 46 Editing a user arpeggio pattern A When you wish to edit a user arpeggio pattern first turn off memory protect by unchecking the Memory Protect Arp UsrPat check box in the Preference page of GLOBAL 1 1 System If you enter this mode from the Program mode your editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern specified for the selected program CD In Program mode select a program for which the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit is selected or a program that you wish to use as a basis for editing the arpeggio pattern 2 Press the ARP ON OFF key to turn the arpeggia tor on the key will light Even if you moved to Global mode from a program in which the arpeggiator was turned off you can use the ARP ON OFF key to turn it on Select the GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Setup page GLOBAL 6 1 frp Pattern Setup Pattern In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit For this example select an empty user arpeggio pat tern If a blank pattern is selected playing the keyboard will not start an arpeggio Although preset arpeg gio patterns P000 P004 can be selected they can not be edited When you edit a user arpeggio pattern the changes will h
180. ers In this case set Foot Switch Assign to Foot SW CC 82 and Foot Pedal Assign to Foot Pedal CC 04 Here we will show how to make settings that allow an assignable switch to change programs or combina tions CD Connect a Korg PS 1 pedal switch or other momentary footswitch to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack 2 Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode Press the EXIT key Press the F3 Foot key Select Foot SW Assign and select either Pro gram Up or Program Down If you select Program Up the next higher program number will be selected each time you press the foot switch If you select Program Down the next lower pro gram number will be selected each time you press the foot switch 117 6 Set Foot SW Polarity to the polarity of the pedal you connected If you connected a Korg PS 1 pedal switch select KORG Standard The pedal will not function cor rectly if you do not select the correct polarity If you wish to keep this setting after the power is turned off you must Write the Global settings to memory rp 45 Press the PROG key to enter PROG 1 1 Play or press the COMBI key to enter COMBI 1 1 Play Then press the foot switch and the program com bination will change Selecting different Velocity and Aftertouch curves You can change the way in which velocity or after touch will affect the volume or tone Using this feature you can for example make th
181. es to 1 so that the effect will be easily understandable The delay time will repeat at an interval of a 8th note PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFxX IFX LCR BPM Dela BPM 120 iTimeOver gt L Bs Times 1 Level 26 HiDamp 6 LoDamp 6 CBs J Times 1 Level 26 inLv1 Mod 166 Sre JS V 1 RBs J Times Level 26 Spread 58 C Fb 118 SW1I 807 30 D 56 56 Off 0 puo Utd D Set the realtime controller function to C mode and rotate REALTIME CONTROLS knob 4 TEMPO When you move the joystick away from yourself and rotate the knob the delay time will change Turn on the ARP ON OFF key to start the arpeg giator Move the joystick away from yourself and select the desired arpeggio pattern When you rotate REALTIME CONTROLS knob 4 the delay time will change in synchronization to any changes you make in the arpeggiator tempo A If you rotate the REALTIME CONTROLS knob 4 to change the tempo while the delay is sounding noise may occur in the delay sound This is because the delay sound becomes discontinuous and is not a malfunction 116 m For some effects you can synchronize the LFO fre quency to the tempo Set the effect parameters BPM MIDI Sync to On and BPM to MIDI For details refer to PG p 172 Other functions Tuning to another instrument Transposing When you play this instrument together with other instruments or along with music on a CD or tape you may need to adjus
182. ese include a variety of patterns Thewayarwbiehthe poteris played Will depend such as drum or bass phrases or guitar or keyboard on settings such as Octave and Sort P000 P004 in the following diagrams show how the arpeggio backing riffs VNL will be played when Octave is set to 1 and Sort U200 User U215 User is checked P004 RANDOM is one possibility With the factory settings these do not contain pat terns 103 Make settings for the various parameters d Octave 4 UP td of re e rd Octave Select the octave range in which the arpeggio will be played WT amp If a user arpeggio pattern is selected the Octave Motion setting GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Setup page will affect the way in which the arpeggio is played Reso Specifies the timing value of the arpeggio notes over a range of 4 J Gate Specifies the length gate time of each note in the arpeggio If a user arpeggio pattern is selected you can set this to Step In this case the value of the Gt setting for each step GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Edit page will be used amp This value will be in effect when the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode ARP GATE knob is in the center position 12 o clock Be sure that the knob is in the center position when you make this set ting Velocity Specifies the velocity of the
183. ess the nearest function key F1 F7 By pressing the same key you can move consecutively downward You can also use cursor keys a 4 v gt to move left up down right You can also move to the desired page by holding down the MENU key and using numeric keys 0 7 to enter a two digit page number In addi tion you can hold down the MENU key and use the cursor keys 4 gt to move in steps of one page in the example shown below this would be Play 2 P M gt Ctrl gt Prm1 gt etc PRGE MENU Select and Other objects To use slider or knob shaped objects use the cur sor keys a a v gt to select the desired item and use the VALUE controllers to adjust the value Other types of objects are shown in the effect rout ing screen rsp 112 Sliders Knobs Master EQ ainLdE1 102 5 RBS 00 0 Bb ar Low Mid High Routing COMBI 7 1 Ed InsertFX Setup insert Effect Fx st Exct Enher 123485678 LE setup JLoFRE T VUA Front and rear panel 11 Setup Connecting audio equipment etc amp Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless operation may damage your speaker system or cause malfunc tions 1 Connecting the AC AC power supply O Connect the included AC AC power supply to the AC power supply inlet of TR and then connect the other end of the cable to an AC outlet 2 Con
184. eters in each page For details on all parameters refer to in the PG p 1 Programs you edit or create can be written into the 512 program memory areas of banks A D They can also be saved and managed on SD card in Media mode e p 43 Program Basic 2 1 1 OSC1 LFO1 5 3 1 OSC1 LFO2 5 3 2 Y Y Y OSC1 Basic 2 1 2 4 PM Filter A B 4 1 1 Amp Level Pan 5 1 1 Ad Filter1 Mod 4 1 2 3 Amp1 Mod 5 1 2 H Filtert LFO Mod 4 1 4 A OSC1 Pitch Mod 3 1 1 2 t Filter1 EG 4 1 5 Amp1 EG 5 1 3 Pitch EG 3 1 5 Controller Setup 22 Arpeggiator 6 1 Insert Effect 7 1 1 osci2 4 1 Insert Effect Master Effect Individi Output p gt Master Effect 1 2 724 3 AUDIO OUTPUT MasterEQ 7 2 4 p gt MONO R Insert Effect 742 8 AUDIO OUTPUT ual INDIVIDUAL 1 2 lt Oscillator Pitch Filter 4 Ampl ifi er gt Effect 1 1 1 and 2 1 2 etc indicate the page tab screens used when editing on this instrument 49 ic functions Program mode 50 The three elements of sound Sound can be broken down into three elements pitch tone and volume On this instrument these element
185. ethod the musical data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data D Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record Set the Recording Mode to Manual Punch In SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page REC Setup 001 01 Un Meter d d Reso i REC Setup Manual Punch Ih Hine 188 Manu MANTRA o Matt Qnuti REC fae Pit T 1 Drums AZO Standard hit 1 End rias ECM Frogs Mpeg Ens Wintel pres J TINH In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording Press the START STOP key Playback will begin At the point at which you wish to begin recording P y 8 8 press the REC WRITE key Recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance 6 When you finish recording press the REC WRITE key Recording will end playback will continue noe Instead of pressing the REC WRITE key in steps and you can use a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Set the GLOBAL 1 1 System Foot page Foot SW Assign to Song Punch In Out p 117 Press the START STOP key Playback will stop and you will return to the loca tion that you specified in step 3 Auto punch in First you must specify the area that will be re recorded Then recording will occur automatically at the specified area With this method the musical
186. ey sound Selecting a program D Press the PROG key the key will light You will enter Program mode Make sure that the upper line of the LCD screen indicates PROG 1 1 Play Category PROG 1 1 Pla Program Proaram Select Program Bank Bank B Category 16 FastSynth 47128 Program Select IRTITTRSTIRRST EE STET Selecting a program number Make sure that Program Select is selected If it is not selected use the cursor keys a lt v gt to highlight the program name in Pro gram Select Use the VALUE controllers to select the program that you wish to play You can use the following methods to select a pro gram Rotate the VALUE dial Press the INC or DEC key Use numeric keys 0 9 to specify the number and press the ENTER key Audition the sound Play a note on the keyboard to hear the sound you selected Alternatively you can press the AUDITION key the key will light to turn on the Audition function and the TR will automatically play a riff phrase suitable for the selected program AUDITION A With the factory settings the Audition function can be used only on the preloaded programs of banks A D and the preset programs G g d Selecting the program bank In Program mode you can switch banks to select pro grams from another bank With the factory settings banks A B C D and G g d contain programs table bellow Press a BANK A G
187. f your performance in measures 5 8 was the best take you can use the Track Play Loop function to repeatedly play back just this portion In the SEO 1 2 Loop Track Play Loop page check Loop On for track 2 set Loop Start Meas to 005 and set Loop End Meas to 008 T82 co2t Fretless Bass Choe Lioop s e A SSCS When you press the START STOP key repeated playback will begin fd After you press the START STOP key to stop playback we recommend that you press the LOCATE key to return to the beginning of the song After recording you will automatically return to the measure at which recording began 4 Recording arpeggio patterns The performance of an arpeggio pattern can be recorded into a song With the settings of this template song the arpeggiator will function on track 4 D In Track Select choose T04 Guitar REC Track Select 001 01 OU Meter 4 4 Reso Hi J 185 Manu 000 Acid Jazz CORPPR Ted Guitar E102 Funkin Guitar Choi ploy RecN Proa 2 Pros tel Min 2 Miine Pres T OAA 2 Press the ARP ON OFF key 9 Press the START STOP key and play single notes or chords Verify that arpeggios are sounded in synchroniza tion with the tempo of the drum and bass perfor mance and rehearse your performance Press the START STOP key to stop playback Then press the LOCATE key to move the location to the beginning of the song ic functions Start recording Press
188. fer to p 46 for the Save procedure Convenient functions for song production and checking the track settings Monitoring just a specific track Muting just a specific track Solo Mute functions The TR provides a Solo function that lets you play only a specific track 1 16 and a Mute function that silences only a specific track These functions can be used in various ways For example you can intentionally mute or solo specific tracks or listen only to the rhythm sec tion of the previously recorded tracks while you record new tracks Let s try out the Mute and Solo functions CD In SEQ 1 1 Play REC press the F2 Prog 8 key to access the Program page Press the START STOP key 2 Select the track 1 PLAY MUTE REC and press the INC key once The display will change to MUTE and the play back of track 1 will no longer be heard In this way the mute function allows you to silence a speci fied track unil the track is un muted SER 1 1 Play REC Program PLAY MUTE REC 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 Reso Hi Morum Feos Feed Rlouito Fa strin Flor 90K i B020 arac i TFI BIELE LCO03 i EFR GE CE OG TC CT Tai rst CHAM Coed standard Ritz CO Poy RECN Prog 2 MMprog telex J ieJ Pres TMA Select the track 2 PLAY MUTE REC and press the INC key once hotel When selecting the parameters of various tracks as above you can also make your selection by hold ing down the TIMBRE TRACK key
189. fter using realtime recording or step recording to record a song or after performing a track edit opera tion For example this can be used effectively when real time recording a track for a song CD Realtime record a track Take 1 Once again realtime record on the same track Take 2 Press the COMPARE key The key will light and take 1 will be recalled Press the COMPARE key once again The key will go dark and take 2 will be recalled If after recording two different takes on the same track you record a third the Compare function will now alternate between the second and third takes Recording a fourth take will mean that Compare now alternates between takes three and four and so on In this fashion Compare always alternates between the last two recorded passes that are made on the same track In this way the Compare function lets you recall the previous recording or the previous state of event edit ing A The Compare function is not available in Global Media and Sampling modes Keyboard input When inputting a note name or velocity value as the value of a parameter you can use the keyboard to input the setting Hold down the ENTER key and play the note that you wish to enter as a value The note name number or velocity value will be input When the GLOBAL 5 1 DKit page or SEQ 5 1 RPPR RPPR Setup page is displayed you can hold down the ENTER key and play a note to recall the sett
190. function While data is being written the LCD screen will indicate Now writing into internal memory Data is written into internal memory by the fol lowing operations Writing updating a Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit or Arpeggio Patterns Loading Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit or Arpeggio Patterns data in Media mode Receiving a MIDI data dump for Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit data or Arpeggio Patterns When using Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed utility commands Move Sample Move MS Conv To Prog Time Slice etc to simultaneously modify programs or drum kits The mode and page that will be selected when the power is turned on The state of this instrument when the power is turned on will depend on the setting of Power On Mode GLOBAL 1 1 System Preference page If Power On Mode is Reset factory setting this instrument will automatically selects the Combination mode 1 1 Play If Power On Mode is Memorize this instrument will be in the mode and page that were last selected when the power was turned off The Memorize setting will remember the mode and page that were last selected the combination number that was last selected in Combination mode and the program number that was last selected in Program mode If another mode is selected when the power is turned on you can press the COMBI key or
191. functions Saving data 45 46 Saving on external media For details on the data that can be saved on external media SD card etc p 42 Types of data that can be saved A Song data and cue lists in the TR s Sequencer mode and multisamples and samples in Sampling mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed cannot be written into internal memory This data will dis appear when the power is turned off If you wish to keep this data you must save it on an SD card or on other external SCSI storage media Other types of data can also be saved on an SD card or if the EXB SMPL option is installed on external SCSI storage media maximum 4 GB and loaded to restore the original settings even if they have been modified It is a good idea to save favor ite settings that you create As an example we will explain how to save the following data nternal memory programs combinations global settings user drum kits user arpeggio patterns e Songs cue lists Multisamples and samples created in Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed amp If you save this data to SD card you may need to use more than one SD card Insert an SD card into the SD card slot For details on handling the SD card please be sure to read Caution when handling an SD card v p 100 If the EXB SMPL option is installed and you want to save data on external SCSI media such as a hard disk refer to th
192. g One Two Three This single piece of waveform data could be shared by three samples with the play RAM SIMM memory Expandable to 64 MB AUDIO INPUT jack Analog digital convertor Analog signal Digital signal Digital analog AUDIO OUTPUT convertor jack Sample 0000 3999 DAC Digital signal Analog signal Used by combinations and songs Program CERERI Multisample 000 999 RAM internal memory SD card SCSI media Media mode ic functions Sampling mode 88 back of sample A producing One Two Three sample B producing One Two and sample C producing Two Three PG p 96 Multisamples A multisample consists of settings that make one or more samples sound in different areas of the keyboard A multisample consist of between one and 128 indexes Each index contains parameters that specify the sample that will playback the zone for which it will playback the original pitch key the playback pitch and level etc Using multisamples When sampling an instrument that is able to produce a wide range of pitches such as a piano recording just one sample and using it playing it back over the entire pitch range will not produce a natural sounding result By using a multisample you can record separate samples for each pitch range and assign these samples to their respective pitch ranges to avoid any unnatural sounds
193. g The location will indicate 001 01 000 Press the EXIT key to access the 1 1 Play REC page Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record In this example select T02 Bass 001 01 OU Meter d d Reso Hi 000 Acid Jazz FE 108 Manu CORPPR ss COZT Fretless Bass play Recrea e Pros tel miz 2 Whine Pres T OAA Press the START STOP key to start playback and practice playing the phrase that you want to record When you are finished rehearsing press the START STOP key to stop playback Press the LOCATE key nole When the power is turned on the Recording Mode of the TR will be set to Over Write record ing in which newly recorded data will be over written For details on other recording modes refer to p 81 and PG p 56 m When recording rapid or difficult phrases you can slow down the tempo and record at a more com fortable tempo Simply adjust the Tempo After recording restore the original tempo SER 1 1 Play REC Play REC Tempo 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 Reso Hi 000 Acid Jazz Se ak m You can use the Quantize and Resolution func tions to correct the timing of your performance as it is recorded For example during realtime recording suppose that you input eighth notes at slightly inaccurate timing as shown in line 1 of the diagram below If you set Reso Resolution to and performed realtime recording the timing would automati cally be correcte
194. g the arpeggiator while you play 30 Checking the structure of a user arpeggio pattern Let s see how combination C053 Echo Jamm is con structed D Select combination C053 Echo Jamm and look at the Arp Play A page and Arp play B page WB if firpeaaiator f Pattern U126CINT Dr BigBeats OSort MLatch Okey Sync O Keyboard Octave 1 Pattern UBA3CINT Octave 1 OSort MLatch Okey Sync O Keyboard comb JU rre JD ris Tharp aJLace eS VIISHA As you can see from the Timbre Assign table in the upper right arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre 4 and 8 and arpeggiator B is assigned to timbre 2 When you play the keyboard the U119 INT Dr BigBeats 2 arpeggio pattern will play the program B084 Drum n Bass Kit of timbre 4 The U039 INT Gt Stab Rhythm arpeggio pattern will play the program B108 Funkin Guitar of timbre 2 If you uncheck Arpeggiator Run A or Arpeggiator Run B the unchecked arpeggiator will stop If you check it once again and play the keyboard the arpeggiator will begin running Look at the COMBI 6 1 Ed Arp Zone page and you will see that the A keys Btm and Top are set so that arpeggiator A will operate only for B3 and lower keys and that the B Top Key and Bottom Key are set so that arpeggiator B will operate only for C4 and higher keys Scan Zone A Bottom Key COMBI 6 1 Ed firp A Key Btm BR Top 63 B Key Btm C4 Top G9 A Vel Btm 661
195. ge H E H SompieT rec ngeres VIDA Set various parameters so that the signal from the AUDIO INPUT jacks will be input to the TR Make the following settings Input 1 Lvl 127 Pan L000 BUS L R Input 2 Lvl 127 Pan R127 BUS L R When you change the setting from Off to L R or IFX the volume level of the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks or the headphone volume may rise abruptly Please use caution 2 Setthe recording level D Play back the audio source that you want to record If the display indicates ADC OVER AD con verter input overload lower the level by turning the rear panel LEVEL knob to an appropriate posi tion Alternatively lower the level of the output source fas The best audio quality will be obtained at a level slightly lower than when the ADC OVER indi cation appears i e the highest level that does not cause an input overload 2 Press the REC WRITE key The level meter allows you to check the volume of the input SMPL 1 1 cara Input Pref Recording Level 1 L R i o ERES A uri If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE controller to lower the Recording Level slider located in the right of the display from the 0 0 position to an appropriate level 9 When you have finished making adjustments press the REC WRITE key Also stop playback of your audio source 3 Specify the recording method Manual
196. gram combination vs Assigning a name Rename After you have input the name press the F8 OK key to return to the Write Program Write Combination dialog box To execute the Write operation press the F8 OK key To cancel without executing press the F7 Cancel Key When you press the F8 OK key the display will ask Are you sure When you press the F8 OK key once again the data will be written Using the REC WRITE key to write This method can only be used to write to the selected program combination number D Press the REC WRITE key The following dialog box will appear The screen shown is for Program mode Update Program B888 Big Sweep Stab fire you sure 2 To write the data press the F8 OK key To cancel without writing press the F7 Cancel key 43 Assigning a name Rename You can modify the name of an edited program combi nation song drum kit user arpeggio patterns etc You can also modify the category names for programs and combinations These renaming operations can be performed in the following pages The function buttons will have the following functions Clear Erase all text Del Delete Delete the character at the cursor loca tion Ins Insert Insert a space at the cursor location Cap Capital Switch between uppercase and lowercase letters 3 Move the cursor to the left k Move the cursor to th
197. gs 48 Loading the preloaded data 48 Program mode PUTT eee 49 How a program is organized 49 Basic program editing se 49 Oscillator settings sse 50 Controller settings sssse 51 Pitch settings e ree neptis 51 Filter settings 52 Amplifier settings see 54 LFO settngs nest 55 Arpeggiator settings 55 BUS settings 55 Insert Effect settings sss 55 Master Effect settings sssssss 55 More about Alternate Modulation 56 Auto Song Setup function 56 Combination mode REREREREREERERRERRRRRRRRRRRREN 57 How a combination is organized 57 Basic combination editing 57 Timbre 1 8 program pan and volume 58 Controller settings sssss 59 Settings for status MIDI channel and playing mode sse 59 Note timing and scale settings 60 Layer and split settings 60 Velocity switch settings sss 61 MIDI filter settings 61 Arpeggiator settings 61 Bus settings nnen r a EE A Ri 61 Insert Effect settings sss 61 Master Effect settings ssssssss 61 Auto Song Setup function 62 Sequencer mode 63 Features of the sequencer 63 The st
198. hat reverb is applied to the sound You can adjust the effect settings in the IFX page F4 key After pressing the EXIT key press the F2 Rec key to access the SMPL 1 1 Recording Recording page g Sample Mode Sample Setup Time 43 6915 REC Setup Ppi phi YA Mode Manual Count Down Off d 126 Pre Trigger a00ms Semp l ec Minera VIDA 6 In Sample Setup set Mode Sample Mode to Stereo Now the sound of the internal LR channels can be sampled in stereo Press the F1 Sample key and then press the F6 CREATE key to create a new index Press the REC WRITE key Press the START STOP key and speak the word s that you want to sample Recording will begin according to the Threshold setting Press the START STOP key to stop 8 Play the keyboard When you play the Orig K note or press the AUDITION key the sampled sound will be heard Assigning a name to the sample or multisample The TR allows you to create up to 4 000 samples and 1 000 multisamples limited by the amount of mem ory It is a good idea to assign names so that you can distinguish individual samples and multisamples Naming a multisample Press the F1 Sample key to access the SMPL 1 1 Recording Sample page Select MS and use the INC DEC keys to select the multisample to which you want to assign a name 3 Press the F8 UTILITY key to access t
199. he TR can be played from the computer either via USB or via a MIDI interface O You can use a MIDI interface to connect the MIDI connectors of TR to the MIDI connectors of your computer You can connect the TR s USB B connector to the USB connector of your computer x PG p 233 MIDI applications Connecting MIDI devices computers amp Some USB MIDI interfaces may not be able to transmit or receive the TR s MIDI exclusive mes sages amp The USB connector of the TR is only able to trans mit and receive MIDI data 13 14 Inserting removing a card in the SD card slot If an SD card is inserted in the SD card slot you can use it to save or load various types of TR data Inserting a card Insert an SD card in the SD card slot With the card label facing upward insert the con nector end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in until you hear a click J SD card slot L SD card Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when you insert it Forcing it in the wrong direction may damage the slot or the card and the data may be lost Removing a card amp Never remove an SD card from the slot while load ing saving or formatting is in progress Remove the card from the SD card slot Press the card inward you will hear a click and the card will pop out part way allowing you to pull it completely out Refer to the owner s manual included with your card and o
200. he converted pro gram Set the Use Destination Program Parameters set ting For this example uncheck this If you execute con version with this unchecked the program will be created with the sound that you heard in Sampling mode E3 If you want to use the program parameters of a preloaded program copy that program to bank D127 before you perform this operation Use the To field to select that program and check Use Destination Program Parameters before you per form the conversion However if you want to convert a stereo multi sample with Use Destination Program Parame ters checked you must change the Mode Oscillator Mode to Double for the conversion destination program To before executing the conversion 6 As necessary press the F5 Name key to access the text dialog box and assign a program name Press the F8 OK key A dialog box will ask you for conformation Press the F8 OK key once again and the conversion will begin Listen to the converted program Move to Program mode select the program D127 and play the keyboard to hear the sound A The converted program settings will automatically be stored in internal memory but the sample data you created will be lost when the power is turned off In order to reproduce the sound of the pro gram after the power is turned on again you must first load the previously saved sample data in Media mode When loading
201. he data of that note number will be deleted from the keyboard as long as you continue pressing that note Similarly bender data will be deleted as long as you tilt the joystick in the X horizontal direction and after touch data will be deleted as long as you apply pressure to the keyboard When you are once again ready to record musical data uncheck the Remove Data check box Press the START STOP key Playback will end and you will return to the record ing start location that you specified in step 4 If Loop All Tracks is selected normal playback will be looped as well Multi multitrack recording Multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record onto multiple tracks each with a different channel This method can be used with overwrite overdub manual punch in and auto punch in recording Using the arpeggiator to record multiple tracks simultaneously A multi track performance using the arpeggiator function can be recorded simultaneously using multi recording p 79 When simultaneously recording multiple tracks using the RPPR function You can use multitrack recording to simultaneously record the playback of multiple tracks that are being triggered by the RPPR function For the procedure refer to Realtime recording an RPPR performance vs p 76 When simultaneously recording multiple tracks of MIDI data from an external sequencer etc CD Make sure that the TR s MIDI IN and the external seq
202. he keyboard Program B Strong Keyboard playing Program A Soft dynamics MM HMM Sess Keyboard playing dynamics On this instrument you can use a different program for each of up to eight timbres and combine two or more of the above methods to create even more com plex setups velocity switches between different programs Program A Program B Program D Strong Keyboard playing Program C Soft dynamics Example B and C D are split In the lower keyboard range A and B are layered In the higher keyboard range C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A As an additional possibility you can set the slope for a key zone or velocity zone so that the volume dimin ishes gradually This lets you change a split into a key board crossfade or a velocity switch into a velocity crossfade Program B Keyboard X Fade keyboard crossfade As you play from low notes to high notes the volume of A will fade out and the volume of B will fade in Program A TAM Program B M Keyboard playing Strong dynamics Program A Soft Velocity X Fade velocity crossfade As you play with increasingly stronger velocity the volume of A will fade out and the volume of B will fade in
203. he note press the F5 Tie At this time the previously input note will be extended by the length of Step A22 E3 If you want to check the note that you will input next press the PAUSE key In this state playing a key will produce sound but will not input a note Press the PAUSE key once again to cancel the record pause state and resume input E5 To input a chord simultaneously press the notes of the desired chord Even if you do not press them simultaneously notes that were pressed before you took your hand off of all keys will be input at the same location However in the above example the program of track 8 will not sound chords This is because the program is set to mono mode and the song fol lows the setting of the program In other words because this track is set to Force OSC Mode PRG the Voice Assign Mode setting of Mono for the program B042 Express Lead remains valid When you are finished inputting press the F8 Done key Press the START STOP key to play back A When you begin step recording all data following the recorded measure will be erased from that track You need to be aware of this if you begin step recording from a measure mid way through the song If you want to re input data into a measure that already contains data perform step recording in another un recorded track and execute Move Measure or Copy Measure PG p 79 If you want to edit or add to the recor
204. he utility menu use the F7 key etc to select Rename MS and press the F8 OK key A dialog box will appear Rename Multisample Stereo 888 NewMS Baa L Press the F5 Name key to display the text dia log box and assign a name of SMPL Demo 1 4 x amp t 0123456789 5 422 SRBCDEFGH JKLMNOPORSTUUUXYZINI abcdefghi jkImmoparstuvuxuztI3 lN Grea per JL ns JEse gL 2L v Mane 9r Press the F1 Clear key Input the first character Use the VALUE dial and the INC DEC keys or a a v gt keys to select S Input the second character Press the F6 key Use the VALUE dial and the INC DEC keys or a A v gt keys to select M Repeat these steps to input all of the characters and then press the F8 OK key twice p 44 m A stereo multisample will have a L and R dis played at the end of the name meaning that you will be able to input 14 characters The L and R are fixed You can input 16 characters for a mono multisample This also applies to samples Naming a sample CD Press the F1 Sample key to access the SMPL 1 1 Recording Sample page 2 Select Index and use the INC DEC keys to select the sample to which you want to assign a name For this example select Index 001 SMPL 1 1 Recording Sample index SMPL 6666 NewSample_6a88 Orig K C2 Topk Cc2 Lsompre Rec J n rres G A amp Itis also
205. hen you play the key e board an arpeggio will play according to the selected arpeggio pattern P002 ALTI i z ic functions note The on off setting is stored when the program is written ALTI Arpeggiator settings ii D Select the PROG 6 1 Ed Arp Arpeg Setup page e e e a Arpeggiator settings PROG 6 1 Ed Arp Arpeg Setup Pattern P003 ALT2 Pattern IIT M NN Octave 1 Gate sox Sort Okey Su Swing 000 L setup Eon T UIS A Reso F Velocity Key Lateh CiKeuboard ALT2 2 Use J Tempo to set the tempo You can adjust the tempo by rotating REALTIME e CONTROLS C mode TEMPO knob The LED will blink at the specified tempo P004 RANDOM T If MIDI Clock GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI is set to Pn Eat T External or Ext USB the display will indicate J RAN onl os EXT This setting lets you synchronize the tempo with an external MIDI device In this case it will not be possible to change the tempo on the TR In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern e You can select from preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 and user arpeggio patterns U000 INT 215 U000 INT U199 INT User With the factory settings various arpeggio patterns are preloaded Th
206. her page press the MENU key and repeat the procedure from step 3 3 Selecting parameters Use the a 4 v gt cursor keys to select the parameter that you wish to edit In Combination mode pages that display timbres 1 8 or in Sequencer mode pages that display tracks 1 8 or 9 16 you can hold down the TIMBRE TRACK key and press the nearest function key F1 F8 to select the desired timbre or track 4 Setting a parameter The parameter value in the edit cell can be set by using the front panel VALUE controllers INC DEC keys VALUE dial numeric keys 0 9 key HOLD key and ENTER key As necessary you can also use the BANK A GM keys and the COMPARE key In the case of parameters that require you to enter a note or velocity value you can enter the value by play ing a key on the keyboard while holding down the ENTER key VALUE controllers gt 13 X IN CJ DEC keys Use these when you wish to make fine adjustments to the value VALUE dial Use this when you wish to make large changes in a value Numeric keys 0 9 EN TER key key HOLD key Use these when you know the parameter value that you wish to input After using the numeric keys 0 9 to input a number press the ENTER key to finalize the parameter value Use the key to enter negative numbers Use the HOLD key to enter a decimal point In the 1 1 Play page
207. her than Step the Gt Gate and Vel Velocity that were specified for each indi vidual step will be ignored and all notes of the arpeggio will sound according to the settings in PROG 6 1 Ed Arp Be sure to verify the settings of the program Before you set Gt Gate move the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode ARP GATE knob to the center position 12 o clock amp Before you set Vel Velocity move the REAL TIME CONTROLS C mode ARP VELOCITY knob to the center position 12 o clock PROG 6 1 Ed firp peg p Pattern U266cUser ArpeggioPat266 Octave 1 Gate Sort Velocity Step r Latch Keyboard Swing 005 L setup Eon T TUIS Reso F To change the user arpeggio pattern name use the Utility Rename Arpeggio Pattern p 44 2 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pat tern to internal memory be sure to Write the user arpeggio pattern p 45 If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost 13 If you wish to save the state of the program at the same time return to Program mode and write the program p 43 Other examples of creating a user arpeggio pat tern Melody pattern CD Set Step Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Ptch Pitch Offset to 00 2 Set Step Step No to 02 and press the 0 key Set Ptch Pitch Offset to 10 9 Set Step Step No to 03 and press
208. here s how to load the combination B015 Rock Organ into C064 Modern Piano D Perform steps 1 4 described above to access the dialog box Load Preload Demo Data hi B015 Rock Organ ni R C864 Modern Piano 2 Use the INC DEC keys to set Kind to Combi nation Press the w key to move downward and use the INC DEC keys to select Single Press the v key to move downward and use the INC DEC keys to select the combination B015 Rock Organ as the copy source Press the v key to move downward and use the INC DEC keys to select the combination C064 Modern Piano as the load destination To 6 Press the F8 OK key twice The data will be loaded and C064 will be the Rock Organ combination Program mode In Program mode you can select play and edit pro grams Program mode consists of pages 1 1 Play 7 2 Ed Mas terFX In 1 1 Play you can select and play programs You can also edit the sound in simple ways and make arpeg giator settings p 32 In 2 1 Ed Basic 7 2 Ed MasterFX you can edit the parameters of the program that was selected in 1 1 Play When shipped from the factory the TR contains numerous preloaded programs You can edit these pre loaded programs to create your own original pro grams You can also create original programs using your own sampled waveforms or multisamples that you sampled in Sampling mode using the EXB SMPL opt
209. ide The Parameter Guide contains explanations and other information regarding the operations of the parame ters and settings on the TR The explanations are orga nized by mode and page Explanations and other information on the effects and their parameters are also provided for each effect Refer to this guide when an unfamiliar parameter appears in the display or when you need to know more about a particular function Voice Name List This lists the multisamples and drumsamples that are built into the TR and the factory preset combinations programs drum kits and user arpeggio patterns Refer to these lists when you wish to know more about the preloaded sounds Conventions in this manual References to the TR The TR is available in 88 key 76 key and 61 key mod els but all three models are referred to without distinc tion in this manual as the TR Illustrations of the front and rear panels in this manual show the 61 key model but the illustrations apply equally to the 76 key and 88 key models Abbreviations for the manuals OG PG VNL References to the manuals included with the TR are abbreviated as follows in this document OG Operation Guide PG Parameter Guide VNL Voice Name List included in the CD ROM Switches and knobs References to the switches dials and knobs on the panel are enclosed in square brackets Parameters in the LCD display screen Parameters displayed in the LCD screen are enc
210. if Arpeggiator Run A or B are not checked and if no timbres have been assigned in Assign then the arpeggiator will not operate Select the GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Setup page GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Setup Ar ggio Tupe Rs Played Fixed Note e P Octave Motion Up iE Yrer feet Plaid pent yey If you moved here from Combination mode use the Arp Arpeggio Select A and B to select the arpeggiator that you wish to edit If this is A your editing will apply to the parame ters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A If this is B your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B Switch between arpeggiators A and B and edit their respective user arpeggio patterns If you wish to stop one of the arpeggiators return to Combination mode and in COMBI 1 1 Play select the Arp A or the Arp B page and uncheck the Arpeggiator Run check box To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern use the Utility Rename Arpeggio Pattern p 44 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pat tern in internal memory you must write the user arpeggio pattern In this case both user arpeggio patterns will be written simultaneously If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost e p 45 If you wish to save the state of the combination at the same time return to Combination mode and write the combination p 43 mm When ed
211. in which you actually played the notes or in the order in which you played the notes O Use the cursor keys a a v gt to select the Sort check box and use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys to make the setting Checked the arpeggio will sound each note in the order of its pitch regardless of the order in which you actually played the notes Unchecked the arpeggio will sound each note in the order in which you actually played the notes Letting the arpeggio continue playing even after you take your hand off the keyboard You can select whether the arpeggio will continue playing when you take your hand off the keyboard or whether the arpeggio will stop playing when you take your hand off the keyboard O Use the cursor keys a v gt to select Latch and use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys to make the setting Checked The arpeggio will continue playing even after you remove your hand from the keyboard Unchecked The arpeggio will stop playing when you remove your hand from the keyboard Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your key board timing You can specify whether the arpeggio will begin at the moment you play the keyboard or whether it will always play in synchronization to the MIDI clock tempo O Use the cursor keys a a v gt to select Key Sync and use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys to make the setting Checked When you take your hand co
212. ing U00 Pattern 00 User Pattern U00 U99 2 92898 ic functions mode 75 76 drums and bass to the C 2 B2 keys and use these keys to control pattern playback and use keys C3 and above to play solos in realtime It is a good idea to keep the assigned keys together in this way RPPR playback Let s use the RPPR you created to perform in the SEO 1 1 Play REC page In Sequencer mode select SEQ 1 1 Play REC Check the RPPR check box The RPPR function will be turned on The on off setting is memorized for each song REC RPPR On Off 001 01 OU Meter 4 4 Reso Hi 004 Hip Hop Rap 4 898 Manu Ir RPPR T 1 Drums T81 Eo004HipHop Kit Iplay Rech Proa 2 Pros tel Mix s Totis te Tl Prec T TS Play the keyboard and patterns will begin playing according to the RPPR settings Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of Beat or Measure will synchronize to the pattern playback of the first key PG p 73 Sync e If you are playing the pattern in synchronization when Sync is Beat Measure or SEQ the pattern will start accurately if you play the note slightly earlier than the timing of the beat or measure Even if you play the note slightly later than the beat or measure but no later than a 32nd note it will be considered to have started at the beat or measure and the beginning of the pattern will be compressed so that the remainder of the pl
213. ings that have been assigned to the note you played 17 on Basic 18 Mi Mili Jh ay PE r ee aE md T Oe pum z 127 m n A UM E E NE bo NE A NM Turning the power on off A Before you turn on the power make sure that the desired connections have been made as described in Setup rp 12 1 Turning the power on Press the TR s POWER switch to turn on the power The LCD screen will display the name of your model and the software version The following graphic shows the factory set LCD screen The version number is subject to change without notice min AM Version 1 8 8 SIMM Slot1 SIMM Slot2 2 Turn on your powered monitors or stereo amp Raise this instrument s VOLUME slider to an appropriate level and adjust the volume of your powered monitors or stereo amp 2 Turning the power off D Set this instrument s VOLUME slider and the volume of your powered monitor or stereo amp to zero 2 Turn off the power of your powered monitor or stereo amp 3 Press this instrument s POWER switch to turn off the power Never turn off the power while data is being writ ten into internal memory If the power is turned off while processing is being performed memory write operations will not be completed correctly If this occurs this instrument will automatically initialize its internal memory so thatitwilloperatecorrectly Thisisnotamal
214. ion or loaded into internal memory in Media mode note If the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed the TR will have AUDIO INPUT jacks that allow external audio to be input In Sampling mode you can sample these external audio input sources In modes other than Sampling mode the TR s internal effects can be applied to the external audio input sources allowing a wide range of applications p 115 PG p 128 All transmission and reception of MIDI data in Program mode is performed on the Global MIDI channel The global MIDI channel is set in GLO BAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Channel How a program is organized A program consists of the many parameters of 2 1 Ed Basic 7 2 Ed MasterFX The diagram below shows the structure of a program Basic program editing With the factory settings this instrument s program bunks A B C and D contain preloaded programs You can edit these programs to create your own original programs noe For parameters in 2 1 Ed Basic 5 3 Ed LFOs that are set independently for each oscillator 1 and 2 you can use the Utility Copy Oscillator to copy settings from one oscillator to the other This is a convenient way to make the same settings for two oscillators or to copy settings from one oscillator to the other amp Ifyou wish to save an edited program into internal memory be sure to Write the program rs p 43 In this section we will give examples of how to modify representative param
215. ircuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the user s authority to operate this equipment CE mark for European Harmonized Standards CE mark which is attached to our company s products of AC mains operated apparatus until December 31 1996 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC And CE mark which is attached after January 1 1997 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Also CE mark which is attached to our company s products of Battery operated apparatus means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC Data handling Malfunctions due to incorrect operation may cause the contents of memory to be lost so we recommend that you save important data on the external media SD card etc Please be aware that Korg will accept no responsibility for any damages which may result from loss of data About copyright This device is intended for use with material of which you yourself are the copyright owner or for which you have received permission from the copyright owner to duplicate If you are not the copyright owner or have not received permission from the copyright owner to duplicate the mate rial you are in violation of cop
216. irst step in steps equal to the timing value specified by Reso Resolution The vertical lines of the grid shown in the center of the LCD screen indicate the steps Use Step Step No to select the step For each step specify Ptch Pitch Offset Gt Gate Vel Velocity and Flam To change Step you can either use the a gt keys or select Step Step No and use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys 107 settings ic functions Arpeggi Tone At each step a chord consisting of up to 12 tones Tone No 00 11 can be sounded To input tones select Step Step No and then use numeric keys 0 9 and HOLD to input tones The Tone No corresponds to the 0 9 and HOLD keys as shown below Each time you press a 0 9 or HOLD key the corresponding tone will be turned on off The horizontal lines of the grid shown in the center of the LCD screen indicate the tones Tone00 09 0 9 keys Tone10 key Tone11 HOLD key D Set Step Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Step Step No to 02 and press the 1 key 3 Set Step Step No to 03 and press the 2 key Set Step Step No to 04 and press the 1 key Set Step Step No to 05 and press the 3 key 6 Set Step Step No to 06 and press the 1 key Set Step Step No to 07 and press the 2 key Set Step Step No to 08 and pres
217. it in Edit 1 of 3 1 Loop Edit in the various pages of 4 1 Multisample and in 5 2 Ctrl Setup When you execute this utility the state of the currently selected multisample will be converted into a program In Program mode you can make filter amp and effect settings etc and play the sample as a program The resulting program can be used in a combination or multi For details on using the Utility menu command Conv To Prog refer to p 38 and PG p 99 Using samples in a drum kit A sample you created in Sampling mode can be used as one of the instruments in a drum kit In the GLO BAL 5 1 DKit High Sample page and Low Sample page set Drumsample Bank to RAM and use Drumsample to select the sample that you created Using Time Slice to divide a sam ple and play itin Sequencer mode Time Slice automatically detects the attacks of the kick and snare etc in a rhythm loop sample a looped sam ple containing a drum pattern etc and automatically divides the sample at the appropriate points The resulting samples can be automatically turned into a multisample and program Sequencer mode perfor mance data for replaying the divided samples can also be created automatically Here are some ways that you can use a time sliced sample in a Sequencer mode song Adjust the tempo of several rhythm loop samples all of differing tempos without affecting their pitch Make realtime changes to the tem
218. it is best to set KSC Allocation to Clear When saving it is a good idea to execute Save All PG p 152 to save the samples and multisamples along with the con verted program and then load all of this data together PG p 143 147 Sampling and looping a drum phrase Here s how you can sample a drum phrase or similar phrase from an audio CD and loop the playback You will need to provide a drum rhythm loop sample Initially it is a good idea to begin with a rhythm loop sample that has a fairly simple beat As an example we will sample one measure of a 140 BPM drum phrase in a 4 4 time signature 1 Connect your external audio device and make input settings D Turn off the power Then turn it on again When you turn off the power all sampling data will be erased Be sure to save any important data before you perform this step nole This explanation assumes that you are starting from the default state immediately after power on 2 Connect the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks on the rear panel of the EXB SMPI to the AUX OUT L and R jacks of your CD player Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the LINE position and set the LEVEL knob near the center EXB SMPL AUDIO INPUT i MIC UNE MAX MIN O C 3 Press the SAMPLING key to enter Sampling mode Press the F3 In Pref key to select the SMPL 1 1 Recording Input Pref pa
219. it near the center In Sampling mode 1 1 Recording select the Input Pref page errat els up In Input 1 set the various parameters that spec ify how the signal from the AUDIO INPUT jacks will be received by the TR Lvl adjusts the volume Normally you will set this to 127 Pan adjust the panning For this example set it to L000 Set BUS If you wish to use the TR s insert effect to process the incoming sound select IFX here For this example select L R The input sound will be sampled just as it is Be aware that when you change the setting from Off to L R or IFX the volume level in the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks and in the head phones may rise excessively Input 1 controls the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack and Input 2 controls the AUDIO INPUT 2 jack The settings above will cause the sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack to be output from the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO jack and from the L channel of the headphones 6 Use the LEVEL knob to set an appropriate level If an overload occurs in the input stage of the TR ADC OVER AD converter overload will be dis played above the Recording Level slider Adjust the LEVEL knob or the output level of the external audio device just low enough so that the ADC OVER does not appear i e the maximum level that does not cause an overload Connections and settings for a stereo source When sampling in stereo from a stereo mic the o
220. iting a user arpeggio pattern pay atten tion to the global MIDI channel the channel of each track and the arpeggiator assignments and make sure that the arpeggiator you are hearing is the pattern that you wish to edit If you moved here from Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed the arpeggiator will not turn on Nor will it be possible to edit arpeggio patterns Synchronizing the arpeggiator The note timing of the arpeggiator will differ depend ing on the state of the arpeggiator Key Sync check box If this is checked the arpeggiator will operate at the timing of the first note on you play from a state in which all keys are released If this is unchecked the arpeggiator will operate in synchronization with the internal or external MIDI clock The paragraphs below explain how synchronization occurs when the Key Sync check box is unchecked However synchronization with Song Start and with the MIDI realtime command Start message are excep tions to this Synchronization between arpeggia tors A and B In Combination and Sequencer mode two arpeggia tors can operate simultaneously In this case if you start an arpeggiator whose Key Sync is unchecked while the other arpeggiator is already running the arpeggiator you started will synchronize to the x Tempo based on the timing of the already running arpeggiator If Key Sync is checked A and B will each oper y oy P a
221. key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on keyboard When you play a key to which the sample is assigned the highlighted range of the keyboard dis played in Keyboard amp Index and the sample will be played back according to its loop settings The procedure for using the ZOOM and Zero Use Zero check boxes is the same as for 3 1 Loop Edit From the list of Utility menu select the desired editing command Make the appropriate settings in the dialog box and press the F8 OK key to execute For details on each command PG p 101 A note on saving samples In the dialog boxes of some Utility menu there is a Save to No setting that lets you specify the sample number to which the edited sample will be saved At this time a vacant sample number will be selected automatically so you will change the setting only if you want to specify the save destination number If you check Overwrite in the dialog box of the com mand the data prior to editing will be deleted and will be overwritten by the edited data Normally you will execute the Write operation without checking this so that the unedited data is preserved When you are completely finished with your editing you can use the Utility menu command Delete SMPL to delete unneeded samples A In Sampling mode there is no Compare function that lets you compare the data before and after editing If you wish to preserve the u
222. knob to adjust the dura tion of the arpeggiated notes Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the notes and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the notes At the center position 12 o clock the note length will be as specified by the program parameter Gate 6 1 Ed Arp Arpeg Setup page noe The knob setting is saved when you write the pro gram You can control the effect by simultaneousl y y adjusting the REALTIME CONTROLS A mode 4 EG RELEASE knob Adjusting the strength of the arpeggio notes D Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT key to make the right C LED light Rotate the ARP VELOCITY knob to adjust the strength of the arpeggiated notes Rotating the knob toward the left will make the notes weaker and rotating the knob toward the right will make the notes stronger At the center position 12 o clock the velocity will be as specified by the program parameter Velocity 6 1 Ed Arp Arpeg Setup page nofe The knob setting is saved when you write the pro gram 28 m You can control the tone effectively by simulta neously adjusting the REALTIME CONTROLS A mode 1 LPF CUTOFF 2 RESONANCE HPF and 3 EG INTENSITY knobs Settings in the LCD screen O In PROG 1 1 Play press the F3 key to select the Arp Play page 000 Big Sweep Stab firpeaaiator Pattern Ua 75CINT Bs Rf EpicTrance Octave 1 sort MLatch Okey Sync O Keyboard ESDA are SSS Se
223. l please keep it for later reference Keeping foreign matter out of your equipment Never set any container with liquid in it near this equipment If liquid gets into the equipment it could cause a breakdown fire or electrical shock Becareful not to let metal objects get into the equipment If something does slip into the equipment unplug the AC AC power supply from the wall outlet Then contact your nearest Korg dealer or the store where the equipment was purchased THE FCC REGULATION WARNING for U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec tion against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communi cations However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a c
224. l operate only for notes B3 and lower Arpeggiator A is also assigned to T8 but this is so that the T4 program B004 Trance GarageKit will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Notice the timbre settings for T4 and T8 Status MIDI Channel Assign T4 INT 02 A T8 Off Gch A 106 If the arpeggiator is off playing the keyboard will sound the timbre s that are set to Gch or to the global MIDI channel in this case 01 Since the MIDI Channel of T4 is set to 02 it will not sound T8 is set to Gch but since Status is Off it will not sound Any MIDI channel that is assigned to a timbre will trigger the arpeggiator In this case these will be MIDI Channel 02 and Gch global MIDI channel When the arpeggiator is on playing the keyboard will trigger arpeggiator A which is assigned to T8 Gch T4 will be sounded by arpeggiator A Since the Status of T8 is Off it will not sound Since the Status of T8 is Off it will not sound regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on or off It is a dummy timbre that causes T4 to sound only when the arpeggiator is on Combination B071 In The Pocket Select and play combination B071 In The Pocket Before you play make sure that the global MIDI chan nel GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 Arpeggiator A is assigned to T7 and T8 and arpeggiator B is assigned to T5 When you play the keyboard the T7 program C004 HipHop Kit will be so
225. lay iouis noc dad Saa T Using the arpeggiator in Program mode 27 Settings using controllers 27 Settings in the LCD screen 28 Using the arpeggiator as you play in Combination mode ne 29 Settings in the LCD screen 29 Playing with the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function 31 Simple program editing 4432 Performance Edit ees 32 Realtime controls ees 32 Simple combination editing 33 An example of editing s 33 Sampling recording a sample 35 Sampling a sound and playing it back as one shot un nnnnnBesn6ubeh 35 Using the insert effect while you sample 36 Assigning a name to the sample or multisample nnn 37 Saving sample data nse 38 Converting a multisample into a program 38 Sampling and looping a drum phrase 39 Basic functions e e 42 Saving data osuere ee Types of data that can be saved 42 Writing to internal memory 43 Writing a program or combination 43 Writing global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns 45 Saving on external media 46 MIDI data dump nnne 47 Restoring the factory settin
226. le num ber to be sampled use the INC DEC keys or numeric keys 0 9 and ENTER key to specify the desired number A sample will be created when you record A sam ple name such as 0000 NewSample 0000 will be assigned automatically This name can be edited using the Utility menu command Rename SMPL If you execute sampling when an existing sample such as 0000 NewSample 0000 is selected the new sample will be sampled to a vacant sample number You do not need to be concerned with this setting even when you continue recording successive sam ples 6 Select the 1 1 Recording Recording page g Recording Sample Mode Sample Setup Bank 1 H a Time 87 3815 Mode Mappy L 28 REC Setup BOR i 24 L Count Down Off Pre Trigger Gaems 735 p NMmzred SSS Mode Manual d 126 Set the Mode Sample Mode Monaural source If the Input1 setting Pan is L000 set Mode Sample Mode to L Mono If Pan is R127 set Mode Sample Mode to R Mono Stereo source Set the Mode Sample Mode to Stereo ompic nec rre SSC If an input signal is present the Recording Level dB meter will move according to the Pan setting in Input1 and Input2 This is the recording standby condition In the case of Connections and settings for a mon aural source the L meter will move In the case of Connections and settings for a stereo source theL and R meters will
227. lecting an arpeggio pattern An arpeggio pattern can be selected from preset arpeg gio patterns P000 P004 and user arpeggio patterns U000 INT 215 User With the factory settings U000 199 INT contain a wide variety of preset user arpeggio patterns v VNL O Use the cursor keys a 4 v gt to select Pattern and use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys to select the arpeggio pattern To select a user arpeggio pattern use numeric keys 0 9 to input the pattern number and press the ENTER key Changing the timing value of the arpeggio notes The Reso Resolution parameter in the LCD screen lets you set the timing value of the arpeggiated notes in a range of s J O Use the cursor keys a 4 v gt to select Reso and use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys to specify the spacing of the arpeggi ated notes Selecting the octave range in which the arpeggio is sounded Use the Octave in the LCD screen to specify the range of octaves in which the arpeggio will be sounded v p 104 O Use the cursor keys a 4 v gt to select Octave and use the VALUE dial or INC DEC keys to specify the range of octaves in which the arpeggio will be sounded Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the pitches in the chord you played You can select whether the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded in the order of the pitches in the chord you played regardless of the order
228. length of a note or rest that will be used when entering notes from the keyboard To input a triplet or dotted note select the at the right and press the INC key or DEC key Select 3 for a triplet or for a dotted note uon Duration indicates the length that the note itself will sound Smaller values will produce a staccato note and larger values will produce a legato note For this example leave this setting unchanged Vel is the velocity playing strength and larger values will produce a louder volume Set this to about 090 If you select Key for this parameter the velocity with which you actually played the keyboard will be input 6 On the keyboard press and then release the first note that you want to input The LCD screen will show numerical values for the data that you input In the lower right Next M001 01 000 will change to M001 01 048 and when you input the next note the data will be input at that location Continue pressing notes to input a melody note You can also delete notes or rests or input rests or ties PG p 75 To delete a note or rest that you input press the F6 Back key The previously input note will be deleted e To input a rest press the F4 Rest key This will input a rest of the Step value To modify the length of a note you can modify the Step value before you input the note However if you want to extend the length tie of t
229. lers or modify the parameters to change the way in which the arpeggios are played amp The ARP ON OFF key and the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode TEMPO ARP GATE and ARP VELOCITY knobs are valid for both arpeg giators A and B Their state will be memorized when the combination is written Settings in the LCD screen O In COMBI 1 1 Play press the F4 key to select the Arp Play A page and make settings for arpeggia tor A In COMBI 1 1 Play press the F5 key to select the Arp Play B page and make settings for arpeggiator B COMBI 1 1 Pla B 000 Amp Driven Wurly Arpeggiator Run WIA MIB z rp Play A Combi Select Rrpe33iator B Pattern Paee UP Octave 1 Sort OLatch Okey Sync O Keyboard comb a e Tharp aJCare ey VIDSHR Select the arpeggiator s that will run Use the Arpeggiator Run check boxes to specify the arpeggiator s that you want to run The arpeggiator s that are checked here will operate when the ARP ON OFF key is on However the arpeggiator will play a timbre only if the table displayed beside the check boxes assigns arpeg giator A or B to a Timbre 1 8 These settings are made in COMBI 6 1 Ed Arp Setup page Assign p 105 Arpeggiator A Arpeggiator B For each arpeggiator A and B you can make settings for Pattern Reso Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard p 28 29 Quick Start Usin
230. losed in double quotation marks Boldface type Parameter values are printed in boldface type Content that is of particular importance is also printed in boldface type Procedure steps 0 3 Steps in a procedure are listed as 0 p M PG p m These symbols indicate a reference page number in the Operation Guide or in the Parameter Guide Symbols 4 EE TT These symbols respectively indicate cautions advice and MIDI related explanations Example screen displays The values of the parameters shown in the example screens of this manual are only for explanatory pur poses and may not necessary match the values that appear in the LCD screen of your instrument MIDI related explanations CC is an abbreviation for Control Change Number In explanations of MIDI messages numbers in square brackets always indicate hexadecimal numbers Table of Contents Introduction eene L O VervleW iai dig ada a d ERR id Main features veces 1 Overview of the modes wees 3 Front and rear panel 5 Front panel 6 odios 5 Rear panel 8 Objects and functions in the LCD screen 10 Setup BERRERRRRERRERRERRERRERERREERRERRRERERRRERRRERRRERRRERRRRERERR 12 Connecting audio equipment etc 12 1 Connecting the AC AC power supply 12 2 Connecting audio output devices 12 3 Connecting pedals etc 13 Connections to MIDI equip
231. ly 1 minute 27 seconds in stereo By installing 72 pin SIMM modules you can expand the memory to a maximum of 64 Mbytes which will allow you to record up to four 2 minute 54 second samples in mono or four 1 minute 27 second samples in stereo for a maximum total of approximately 11 minutes 39 seconds of sampling time approximately 5 minutes 49 seconds in stereo For details on expansion refer to PG p 260 A maximum of 1 000 multisamples and 4 000 samples can be created In Media mode you can load multisample sample data from an SD card or SCSI media Korg format or Akai S1000 3000 samples mapped multisamples only format sample data and AIFF or WAVE format sample data can be loaded Once data has been loaded into the TR it will all be treated as Korg format sample data Sample data created on the TR can be exported out put as an AIFF or WAVE format sample file The external audio source that you are sampling can be processed by the one insertion effect to apply effects such as a compressor or EQ The LFO frequency or delay time of the effect can be specified as a BPM value which is highly effective when sampling phrase loops etc Both auto sampling and manual sampling can be performed With auto sampling recording will begin automatically when the input level exceeds a specified threshold In either method of sampling you can make pre trigger settings The audio input supports both mic and line level signals Datay
232. m Select to assign a program to each track At this time you can also use the Utility menu com mand Select by Category to select programs by category PG p 55 You can also use the Utility menu command Copy From Combi to copy settings from a combination e p 77 PG p 52 nofe When assigning a program you can use Track Select to select the track for which you are mak ing assignments and try playing the sound 2 UJ Set the pan and volume of each track SEQ 1 1 Play REC Mixer page u zi Fray RCM Prog 2 Merge Mix 2 Urat JU Pres A In the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Mixer page Pan sets the pan of each track and Volume sets the vol ume of each track Specify the tone generator and MIDI channel that will sound each track SEQ 3 1 Param1 MIDI page SER 3 1 Param1 MIDI AELE Yai Dr ms toe oea e ana HEN C 0s Stereo Strings In the SEQ 3 1 Param1 MIDI page Status speci fies whether each track will sound the internal tone generator or an external tone generator MIDI Channel specifies the MIDI channel for each track If the track status Status is set to INT playing the track data or operating the TR s keyboard or con trollers will cause the TR s internal tone generator to be sounded and controlled If Status is set to EXT EX2 or BTH playing the track data or operating the TR s keyboard or con trollers will cause an external tone generator to
233. master track song parameters such as the song name effect arpeggiator and RPPR parameters and 100 user patterns A maximum of 200 such songs can be created on this instrument Tracks 1 16 and the master track each consist of setup parameters located at the start location and musical data within the track Setup parameters Tracks 1 16 Bank Program No PLAY MUTE REC Pan Vol ume Track Play Loop Loop Start Measure Loop End Measure Status MIDI Channel Bank Select When Status EX2 Force OSC Mode OSC Select Portamento Transpose Detune Bend Range OSC On Off Ctrl Delay Use Program s Scale MIDI Filter Key Zone Velocity Zone Track Name IFX Indiv Out BUS Select Send1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 Master track Time signature Tempo Musical data Tracks 1 16 Note On Off Program Change including Bank Select Pitch Bend After Touch Poly After Con trol Change Pattern No When you change the setting during realtime recording this will be recorded as musical data This allows the starting settings to be modified during the playback Musical data MIDI RPN data can be used to change the starting settings during playback For details on control changes and RPN refer to PG p 236 239 Patterns There are two types of patterns preset patterns and user patterns Preset patterns Patterns suitable for drum tracks are preset in internal memory and can be selected for any song User
234. ment computers 13 1 Connections to MIDI equipment 13 2 Connections to a computer 13 Inserting removing a card in the SD card slot eene 14 Connecting separately sold options 14 1 Audio input connections 14 2 SCSI connections esses 14 Basic operation e 15 Selecting modes pages and tabs setting parameters 15 1 Selecting modes sss 15 2 Selecting pages and tabs 15 3 Selecting parameters sss 16 4 Setting a parameter ssssssss 16 Quick Start we 18 1 Turning the power on eeeeeee 18 2 Turning the power off 18 Listening to the demo songs 19 Loading demo playback data 19 Selecting and playing a demo song in the Sequencer mode nnne 19 Playing a cue list ieee 20 Selecting and playing a program 21 Selecting a program n 21 Selecting and playing a combination nnn 423 Selecting a combination 23 Using controllers to modify the SOUNG coonvoxnio is B 70 JOYSUCK AETETIETPETTEPETCELECEEPCEETLEEEELLIEECL E TETIETTLIT 24 5W 1 W2 iiie aia 24 REALTIME CONTROLS 1 2 3 4 25 Keyboard 26 Foot pedals a 26 Using the arpeggiator while you p
235. mine the time from note off until the sound disappears When you adjust the knob the release times of the fil ter EG and the amp EG will change Normally rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the release time and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the release time note on Attack Level Break Level note off Level Y Release Level Sustain Level gt Time Slope Time Release Time Decay Time Attack Time Start Level 25 26 B mode controls You can control parameters such as volume porta mento time pan or filter and amp EG pitch LFO and master effect send levels etc The B mode function settings are made for each indi vidual program combination or song In Sampling mode the B mode functions are set for the entire mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed e p 119 C mode control You can control the effect of the arpeggiator in real time For details on operation refer to p 27 Viewing the parameters that are assigned to SW 1 SW 2 keys and the REALTIME CONTROLS B mode In Program and Combination modes the B mode func tions of the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 2 3 and 4 and SW1 SW2 keys can be verified in the 1 1 Play page Functions assigned to the SW1 and SW2 keys Functions assigned to Knob1 4 Keyboard Velocity The force with which you initially strike a note can apply an effect Normally thi
236. move Use the Recording Level slider to adjust the level For this example set the slider to the 0 0 setting PG p 94 At the moment that you wish to begin sampling press the START STOP key Sampling will begin Sampling will stop when you press the START STOP key A Sampling will stop automatically when the remaining amount of memory reaches zero Either press the AUDITION key or press the C2 key The sample you recorded will play back If you wish to continue recording samples repeat steps 0 4 vee0 00000000000000000000000009 Auto sampling With auto mode sampling will begin when the input signal exceeds the specified threshold level Select the 1 1 Recording Recording page Sample Setup Time 87 5815 REC Setup Mode PNRM 42 126 R mp nes r T E For Mode REC Mode select Auto This will select auto recording mode Set the Threshold When the input signal exceeds the Threshold level sampling will begin automatically The black triangles at both sides of the Recording Level dB meter display will indicate the specified level m When you use auto sampling the attack portion of the sampled input sound may be lost depending on the Threshold setting If this occurs you can use Pre Trigger to sample the sound that occurs before sampling actually begins Normally you will set this to 0 and use it only when necessary Select the 1 1 Recording Sample page
237. mple names and multisample names of up to 16 characters can be assigned Sample names and multisample names can also be viewed in Media mode PG p 143 Translation How Sampling mode is organized In Sampling mode Anexternal audio signal from an external audio device or microphone connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks is passed through an analog digital convertor and recorded sampled Youcan edit the waveform and loop settings etc of sample data that you sampled or that you loaded from an SD card CD ROM etc in Media mode Youcan assign samples to the keyboard to create a multisample These samples and multisamples can be easily converted to a program using the Utility menu command Conv To Program and these programs can be used immediately in a combination or a song Sampling frequency and bit resolution As shown in the diagram sampling reads the level of the analog signal at fixed intervals along the time axis and stores the levels in memory as digital data Level Analog waveform Time Level 48kHz 48 000 times every second 0 0208 mS cycle Sampled digital 16bit waveform Time 95 536 levels of data The fixed intervals mentioned above are generally expressed as the sampling frequency 48 kHz kilo hertz means that sampling is performed 48 000 times each second and that the interval is 1 second 48 000 times approximately 0 00002083 seconds a
238. mpled in Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed or loaded into internal mem ory in Media mode A drum kit that you edited or created can be written into one of the user drum kit memory areas 00 INT 23 User In Media mode drum kits can also be saved to SD card or other external media Multisample programs and drum kit programs There are two types of programs those whose oscilla tor uses a multisample and those whose oscillator uses a drum kit This selection is made by the PROG 2 1 Ed Basic Prog Basic page Mode Oscillator Mode setting To use a multisample for the program set Mode Oscillator Mode to Single or Double To use a drum kit set Mode Oscillator Mode to Drums About program parameters Just as the character and effect processing of a melodic instrument such as piano organ trumpet and strings is fundamentally different from that of percussion instruments such as drums or timpani the program parameter structure of a multisample program Mode Oscillator Mode to Single or Double is fundamen tally different from that of a drum kit program Mode Oscillator Mode to Drums The program parameters of a multisample specify fil ter and amp settings etc appropriate for a multisam ple For this reason it is difficult to change such a program for use with a drum kit Thus if you wish to edit a drum kit you should first use Program mode to select a program tha
239. mpletely off of the keyboard and then play the first note on the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning This setting is suitable when you want the arpeggio to start from the beginning of the measure as you are playing in realtime Unchecked The arpeggio will always be synchro nized to the MIDI clock tempo Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the notes you play O Use the cursor keys a a v gt to select Keyboard check box and use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys to make the setting Checked The notes you play on the keyboard and the notes played by the arpeggiator will both sound Unchecked Only the arpeggio notes will sound Using the arpeggiator as you play in Combination mode In Combination mode the TR provides dual arpeggia tors allowing you to run two arpeggio patterns simul taneously D Press the COMBI key to enter Combination mode and select a combination p 23 Selecting and playing a combination As you select various combinations you will notice that the ARP ON OFF key will light for some combinations Other settings for the arpeggia tor When you play a key on the keyboard the arpeggiator will start For other combinations you can press the ARP ON OFF key the key will light to turn on the arpeggiator 2 As described in the preceding section Settings using controllers and the following section Set tings in the LCD screen move the control
240. n SEQ 5 1 RPPR Pattern page PG p 71 4 When you play the keyboard you will hear the drum program for track 1 of the template song that was loaded Press the v key to select Track Select T01 Drums Track Select is the track that will be used to record play song data Normally the track selected here can be played from the keyboard and during recording your performance will be recorded on this track in cases other than Multi REC or Master Track ic functions mode 65 66 Use the VALUE control to select T02 Bass and play it from the keyboard Next select T03 T08 in order and play them from the keyboard The TR has sixteen sequence tracks but this template song specifies only tracks 1 8 Select T03 Elec Piano Play REC Track Select 001 01 OU Meter 4 4 Reso Hi 000 Acid Jazz 4 188 Manu ORPPR T83 Elec Piano B0397 Fro Dyno EF play Recrea a Proa A6 miz 2 Jte JT Pree VIINMR 6 Press the START STOP key to play back the pre set pattern that you copied Play the keyboard while you listen to the drum pattern Press the START STOP key to stop 2 Repeatedly playing specific measures of a track Track Play Loop Here s how to use Track Play Loop to repeatedly play back a drum phrase D Press the MENU key to access the page menu PRGE MENU Select and Press the F1 key to select Loop and press the F8 Open key The SEQ
241. n the sounds you sample will automatically be looped 1 1 Recording Input Pref page AutoLoop Auto Loop On On To edit the loop and other playback address settings for the sample use the 3 1 Loop Edit Edit2 page CD Select the sample for which you wish to make loop settings To select the sample use the SMPL Sample Select or Index parameters of 3 1 Loop Edit Edit 1 page or of the 1 1 Recording Sample page c p 91 amp If you use SMPL Sample Select to select the sample be aware that the assignment to the index will also change In the 3 1 Loop Edit Edit1 page use the Lp Loop check box to turn loop playback on off for the sample Looping will be turned on if the box is checked This will operate between the addresses you specify in step Loop On SSE9LpS Eo LpSE is repeated Loop Off SE SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit 1 Loop Index 661 662 ao VIP Gd ddl ce u W3 Tune 66 C Rev SMPL 6668 0ne Two The waveform data of the currently selected sample will be displayed To hear this data play a key in the keyboard range that is highlighted in Keyboard amp Index Alternatively you can press the AUDI TION key to play back the data noe In the case of a sample that was sampled with a Mode Sample Mode setting of Stereo the waveform display will alternate between L and R each time you press the F3 L R key At this time the upper right of the display will indicat
242. n a name to the sample Press the C2 note or the AUDITION key and the sampled sound will play After you have verified the sound assign a name to the sample p 37 e g LOOP1 140 BPM Up to 14 characters can be input as the name of a stereo sample the two char acters L and R at the end are fixed When you assign a name to either the L or R channel the other sample will be named automatically 5 Make loop settings Next we will delete unwanted portions from the sam ple and make settings so that the sample will be looped smoothly m By default when the power is turned on sampled sounds will be looped automatically 1 1 Record ing Input Pref page Auto Loop On On D Press the MENU key to access the page menu Press the F3 key and then press the F8 Open key to select 3 1 Loop Edit SMPL _3 1 Loop Edit Ms EEE TT Edit1 Multisampleselect Index 881 881 eo Miki TEE HI es SMPL 6666 LO0P1 146BPM L ALP Tune 66 Rev Lesits esr T VS Q Notice that 0000 LOOP1 140BPM L is selected for SMPL 3 Press the F2 Edit2 key to access the Edit2 page The waveform data of the currently selected sample will be displayed SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit2 Start m The selected sample is a stereo sample The L and R waveforms will be displayed alternately when you press the F3 L R key 4 Use S Start to set the start address LpS Lo
243. n select up to ten utility menu commands for the current page 10 CATEGO RY key AUDITION key CATEGORY AUDITION CATEG O RY key In each mode you can directly access the utility menu Select by Category by choosing a parameter that can be selected by category and then pressing the Cate gory key This allows you to view and select programs or combi nations by category p 22 AUDITION key This key activates the Audition function which plays a riff phrase suitable for each preloaded or preset pro gram In Program mode pressing the AUDITION key the key will light will cause the audition riff to play repeatedly In Sampling mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed the selected sample will be played 11 EXIT key MENU pace key CURSOR keys v gt PAGE EXIT key In Program Combination Sequencer Sampling if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed and Global modes pressing this key from anywhere other than page 1 1 will take you to page 1 1 of that mode When a dialog box is open this key will cancel the set tings made in the dialog box and close the dialog box corresponds to the Cancel If a Utility menu or page menu is open pressing EXIT will close the menu MENU pace key Use this key to select different pages on screen When you press this key a list of the pages within the mode will appear in the LCD screen Use th
244. n tracks 1 3 When you play back you will hear only the drums bass and electric piano As described in steps 1 2 set song S002 CHO RUS to 008 8 measures making it an eight mea sure song 4 Changing the key transposing modu lating Here s how to change the key of a song D Select song S002 CHORUS Select the SEQ 5 2 Track Edit page Use the a v keys to select track T02 for the key change Specify the measures for which the key will be changed Press the 4 key to select Measure From and use the VALUE controller to set this to 001 Next press the gt key to select Measure To End of and set this to 008 SER 5 2 Track Edit Meas To End of From To End of M 661 M EEE I nmn Press the F8 UTILITY key select the Utility menu command Shift Ers Note and press the F8 OK key el sena erat A dialog box will appear If you did not specify the range of measures in step set From Measure To Measure to specify the range that will be edited Set Mode to Shift Replace and set the value to 003 PG p 81 Shift Erase Note in Track 02 From Measure 661 To Measure aaa Beat Tick 81 888 Beat Tick 64 191 Note Range Btm C 1 Mode Shift Replace Press the F8 OK key The pitch of track 2 will be raised three semitones 6 Use the same procedure to raise the pitch three semitones for each track on which perform
245. n will change and playback will begin At this time the pattern operation will depend on the Sync and M Mode setting Set KEY to C 2 and set Sync to Measure Make the same setting for D2 Now press the notes consecutively Notice that the patterns operate in a different way With the Measure setting patterns will be han dled in one measure units The second and subse quent patterns to be started will start in synchronization with units of a measure relative to the pattern that was started first If you change the M Mode setting to Once the entire pattern will playback to the end even if you release your finger from the keyboard immediately fd To stop playback either press the same key once again or press the C2 or lower key For details on Sync M Mode and Shift refer to PG p 73 The assigned keys will be shown as a keyboard graphic in the LCD screen note Unassigned keys can be used for normal keyboard performance Use Track Select to select the track that will be played from the keyboard For exam ple you might assign backing patterns such as Song 7 RPPR RPPR function is on TAI Drums Track Preset Pattern P00 P149 PO LAT T P00 Pop amp Balad 1 Std ac ae NY Pn PETER T t Drums y Pat Pre P66 Pop amp Balad 1 Std M Manual Shift 00 Syne Beat 5 1 RPPR RPPR Setup L RPPR gt Normal multi playback and record
246. nds include a Save PCG command which saves program combination drum kit user arpeggio pattern and glo bal setting data a Save SEQ command which saves only the sequencer song and cue list data and a Save Sampling Data command which saves only the multi samples and samples of Sampling mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed Select the page menu com mand that is appropriate for the data you want to save to external media noel When using Save All Save PCG amp SEQ and Save PCG to save combinations you should also remember to save the programs used by each tim bre and the drum kits used by the programs and user arpeggio patterns at the same time Similarly when saving programs you should also remember to save the drum kits and user arpeggio patterns used by the programs If your programs or drum kits use multisamples and samples that were created in Sampling mode using the EXB SMPL option we recommend that you use Save All to save the data When you use Save PCG or Save Sampling Data to individually save a program or drum kit or a multisample or sample that you created in Sampling mode using the EXB SMPL option we recommend that you save them under the same filename in the same directory When you use Load PCG to load a PCG file the identically named KSC file will also be loaded so that the cor rect multisamples samples will correspond auto matically When saving
247. necting audio output devices AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R INDIVIDUAL 1 2 Here you can connect a set of amplified monitor speakers or your audio system to output TR s sound If you wish to use the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVID UAL 1 2 jacks of TR we recommend that you use a mixer If you playback TR through your stereo audio sys tem be aware that high volumes may damage your speakers Be careful not to raise the volume excessively KORG X oo 1 4 MUSIC WORKSTATION n Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks to the INPUT jacks of your powered monitor system mixer etc L MONO and R are the main outputs If you are outputting in stereo make connections to the MAIN L MONO jack and the R jack If you are outputting in monaural make connections to the MAIN L MONO jack We recommend that you playback in stereo if possible O If you wish to output from the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 jacks connect these jacks to your mixer and then connect the mixer output to the INPUT of your powered monitor system etc For details on the output of each jack p 112 Routing Headphones O When using headphones plug them into the head phones jack located on the front panel Power Switch Hoh om A Headphones a cm ung e j pasur C E SO OOs Connecting separately sold
248. nedited state of the multisample or sample use Copy SMPL or Copy MS PG p 96 97 to copy the multisam ple or sample before you begin editing it For some Utility menu commands in 2 1 Sample Edit or 3 1 Loop Edit you can execute without checking the Overwrite setting in the dialog box so that the sample data previous to editing will be preserved ic functions Sampling mode 93 94 Multisample editing Editing a multisample is accomplished with a number of operations i e creating indexes for the multisample and assigning a sample to each index editing opera tions such as deleting copying and inserting indexes and detailed settings such as sample level and pitch for each index Multisample editing is performed in 4 1 Multisample noe Basic settings such as creating indexes and assign ing samples can also be made in the 1 1 Record ing Sample page vee0 00000000000000000000000009 Editing the indices To change the number or order of the indexes use the INSERT CUT COPY and CREATE CD Select 4 1 Multisample SMPL 4 1 Multisample MS Er M EI Edit 1 Multisampleselect Index 661 662 ao VIP Gd ddl ce SMPL 6668 0ne Two Orig K C2 TopK B2 East Medite TIERE ER clad GEI UT 2 Use MS Multisample Select to select the multi sample that you wish to edit Select the Index You can also select this by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note
249. nge of velocities that will sound oscillators 1 and 2 In the example shown above the velocity ranges are as follows e OSC1 will sound for all velocity values e OSC2 will sound only for strongly played notes 64 and above e You can use Velocity Multisample Switching in addition to this High Multisample Low Multisample For this example set OSC1 in Velocity SW LH to 32 and OSC2 to 96 The settings are shown as vertical lines in the velocity zone display In this example the multisamples will sound over four levels Velocity values 001 031 sound only the OSC1 Low multisample Velocity values 032 063 sound only the OSC1 High multisample Velocity values 064 095 sound the OSC1 High multisample and the OSC2 Low multisample Velocity values 096 127 sound the OSC1 High multisample and the OSC2 High multisample Controller settings 2 2 Ed Ctrl Ctrls Controls page For each program this tab lets you make settings for the SW1 and SW2 and for the B mode of REAL TIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 p 119 PG p 9 224 225 Pitch settings 3 1 Ed Pitch Here you can specify how the pitch of the multisample selected for the oscillator will change Pitch EG and LFO settings allow the pitch to varied over time The parameters of the OSC2 page and OSC2Ifo page are valid only if Mode Oscillator Mode is set to Double ic functions Program mode 51 52 OSC1 page PROG 3 1 Ed T
250. nning stereo location for each timbre A setting of C064 will reproduce the oscillator pan set ting of the program Moving this to left or right will move the sound to left or right while preserving the pan relationship between the oscillators A setting of L001 is far left and R127 is far right Volume Adjusts the volume of each timbre Create the overall sound by adjusting the volume bal ance between timbres The Volume setting is an important aspect of creating the sound and this setting will have a significant effect on the overall impression produced by the Combination Controller settings 2 2 Ed Ctrl Ctrls Controls page COMBI 2 2 Ed Ctr1 Knob B fissign Knob 1 6 GT ET Controls knob1 B Assign 15U172 Assign iSut 0ctave Up Knob2 B Knob Mod 2 ary Toggle Knob3 B Knob Mod 3 CC amp 28 15U2 JS Y Lock Knobd4 B Knob Mod d CC amp 215 Toggle a Li F For each combination you can specify the functions of the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 and the SW1 and SW2 p 119 PG p 36 224 225 Settings for status MIDI channel and playing mode 3 1 Ed Param1 MIDI page eu e Uriah TUNE Status Here you can specify the state of MIDI and the internal tone generator for each timbre Normally when sound ing the internal tone generator of this instrument you will set this to INT Set this to Off for timbres that you are not using With settings of Off EXT or EX2
251. number Make sure that Combi Select is selected If it is not selected use the cursor keys a a v gt to highlight the combination name in Combi Select 3 Use the VALUE controllers to select the combina tion that you wish to play p 21 Selecting a program 3 Audition the sound Play a note on the keyboard to hear the sound you selected Selecting the combination bank In Combination mode you can switch banks to select combinations from another bank With the factory settings banks A B and C contain combinations 1 table bellow Press a BANK A C key to select a bank The key will light and the selected bank will be dis played in the left of the LCD screen For example to select bank B press the BANK B key The B key will light and the upper left of the LCD screen will indicate Bank B A B C 000 127 for preloaded combinations for user combinations A B C With the factory settings these banks con tain a wide variety of preloaded combina tions that use multiple programs effects and arpeggio patterns 128 programs can be written or rewritten to each bank A C for a total of 384 ts For details of the combination names etc refer to VNL Voice Name List Selecting combinations by category You can select combinations from sixteen categories in the same way as for programs With the factory settings all the preloaded combina tions are organiz
252. o 5 CIA I OSC1 LFO1 OSC1 LFO2 OSC2 LFO 1 OSC2 LFO2 Waveform selects the type of LFO You can choose from a variety of waveforms including standard waveforms such as Triangle Saw Square and Sine as well as Step or Random PG waveforms that pro duce a sample and hold effect v PG p 22 You can create a wide variety of effects by adjusting the Ofs Fade and Dly settings and by changing the sign of the Intensity setting in the 3 1 Ed Pitch 4 1 Ed Filter1 4 2 Ed Filter2 5 1 Ed Amp1 and 5 2 Ed Amp2 pages Frequency specifies the speed of the LFO Freq Mod Frequency Modulation AMS can be used to vary the LFO speed This lets you change the LFO speed by operating a controller or by the EG or Keyboard Track settings MIDI Tempo Sync If MIDI Tempo Sync is checked the Frequency setting will be ignored and the LFO will synchronize to the tempo of the sequencer and arpeggiator This lets you produce vibrato wah auto pan or tremolo that is synchronized to the playback speed of the sequencer or arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings 6 1 Ed Arp Here you can make arpeggiator settings p 103 BUS settings 7 1 Ed InsertFX BUS You can specify the oscillator routing the signal sent to the insert effect master effects and independent out puts p 112 Insert Effect settings 7 1 Ed InsertFX Setup IFX Here you can select insert effect and make set
253. o samples are supported Crossfade Loop An important looping tool that helps smooth out irregularities in long loops which contain complex material By executing Crossfade Loop you can eliminate this problem and create natural sounding loops Link with Crossfade This allows you to join two samples into a single sample You can also crossfade the overlapping por tion of the samples at this time so that the volume changes gradually producing a natural sounding transition The BPM Adjust function playback pitch adjust lets you adjust the playback pitch of each index so that the loop frequency matches the desired BPM value Start loop start and end addresses can be specified in units of a single sample Loop tune reverse playback and loop lock functions are also supported The Use Zero function automatically searches for zero cross points making it easy to find the beginning or end of the waveform or locations that will not produce noise when the sample is played back The grid function displays a BPM based grid on the waveform display helping you to create loops or make waveform edits that match the desired BPM Each multisample allows you to create up to 128 indices Each index consists of a sample assignment a key zone an original key a playback pitch and settings such as level The Keyboard amp Index display lets you edit a multisample while viewing the assignments and zones of each sample Sa
254. oard or perform other operations Dueto changes in the surrounding temperature the LCD screen may on rare occasions be difficult or impossible to read If this occurs perform the following procedure PG p 127 D Press the EXIT key three times and press the fthere is no sound from the OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 jacks make sure that BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign or Bus Select following the insert effect is set to 1 2 1 2 p 112 If specific tracks in Sequencer mode do not sound Make sure that the PLAY MUTE REC or PLAY MUTE is set to PLAY vi p 69 e Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH p 70 e Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound will be produced when you play Notes do not stop In PROG 2 1 Ed Basic select the Prog Basic page make sure that the Hold check box is unchecked sse PG p 5 In GLOBAL 1 1 System Foot page make sure that GLOBAL key Damper Polarity or Foot SW Polarity is set Hold down the EXIT key and press the REC correctly WRITE key omeeeeemHHmeeemHeHHHeeeeeneneeeennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn PG p 128 Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the LCD T QNEM a a a E E Noise or oscillation is heard The power is turned on but the LCD screen does not display normally or an error message is dis played There is no sound when you play the key board and the TR does not function normally
255. ocity Strings switch UUAA KA OA RN NANN As an example we will explain how to create a combi nation like the one shown above In the 1 1 Play Prog page or the 2 1 Ed Prog Mix Prog page use the Program Select area to select the program that will be used for each timbre 1 and 2 Select a brass program for timbre 1 Select a strings program for timbre 2 In the MIDI page of 3 1 Ed Param1 set Status to INT for all the timbres that you wish to use and set MIDI Channel to either Gch or to match the global MIDI channel a G will be displayed after the channel number 3 In 3 4 Ed Vel Zone Vel page set the Top Veloc ity and Bottom Velocity Set timbre 1 to a Top Velocity of 127 and a Bot tom Velocity of 64 Set timbre 2 to a Top Velocity of 63 and a Bot tom Velocity of 1 You can also enter these values by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the key board of this instrument Slope page Here you can specify the range of values over which the original volume will be reached starting from the top velocity and bottom velocity In the case of the above example you could set the velocity zones of the two timbres so that they partially overlap and set Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound changes gradually instead of changing suddenly between velocity values of 63 and 64 MIDI filter settings 4 1 Ed MIDI
256. odulation effects such as chorus This means that you can use the TR as a 2 in 4 out and phaser effect processor 32 40 Other modulation and pitch shift effects such as fs rotary speaker and pitch shifter i Master a Oscillator Filter Amplifier Insert Effect Master EQ OUTPUT 41 51 Early reflection and delay effects LIMONO R 52 57 Reverb effects oue 58 89 Mono and mono chain effects in which two mono effects are connected in series Effects in each mode In Program mode insert effect can be used as part of the sound creating process in the same way that the output sound of the oscillator OSC is processed by the filter and amp to create the final sound Then the master effects can be used to apply spatial type effects such as reverb The stereo 3 band master EQ located immediately before the OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R outputs is used to make final adjustments in tone These settings can be made independently for each program Send Return T Master Effect 1 2 Oscillator Fiter Amplifier gt Insert Effect Master EQ OUTPUT LIMONO R In Combination mode and Sequencer mode insert effect can be used to help create the sound of each tim bre track The master effects are used to apply overall spatial processing and the master EQ is used to make overall adjustments in tone These settings are made in Combination mode inde pendently for
257. of Program and Combination modes the HOLD key will perform the Category Hold or 10 s Hold function PG p 2 BANK A GM keys PROG BANK A B Cc D GM COMBI BANK The BANK A GM keys are used in Program mode to select the program bank and in Combination mode to select the combination bank In Combination mode they are also used to select the program bank for each timbre of the combination In Sequencer mode these keys are used to select the bank of the program used by each track of the song These keys are also used to specify the bank in dialog boxes such as Write Program or Write Combination CO MPARE key COMPARE CJ Use this key when you wish to compare an edited pro gram or combination sound with the un edited origi nal i e the sound that is written into memory When editing a program or combination press this key The key will light and the last written settings for that program number or combination number will be recalled When you press the COMPARE key once again the key will go dark and you will return to the settings that you were editing If you edit the settings that are recalled by pressing the COMPARE key i e the settings that are written into memory the key will go dark and it will not be possi ble to return to the previous settings by pressing the COMPARE key again In Sequencer mode you can use the COMPARE key to make before and after comparisons immediately a
258. of the combination will also change Using a Utility menu command to write D Select the Utility menu command Write Program or Write Combination The Write Program Write Combination dialog box will appear noe You can also access the same dialog box by hold ing down the ENTER key and pressing the 0 key The screen shown is for Program mode Urite Program BOO Big Sweep Stab Category 10 Fastsunth To BOG Big Sweep Stab 2 In Category specify the category of the program combination If the category you specify here is for a program you can use it when selecting by category in the Cat Hold function or the Utility menu command Select by Category PROG 1 1 Play Program page Pro gram Select in the COMBI 1 1 Play Prog page Program Select the COMBI 2 1 Ed Prog Mix Prog page or the SEQ 1 1 Play Program page Util ity menu command Select by Category ic functions In the case of a Combination the category you spec ify here can be selected when you use the Utility menu command Select by Category or the Cat Hold function in COMBI 1 1 Play Combi Select Use To to specify the bank and number of the writing destination program combination Use the VALUE controller to specify the destination 5 If you wish to change the name of the program combination press the F5 Name key Saving data The text dialog box will appear Input the name of the pro
259. on PG p 102 For cautions on the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes refer to About Overwrite PG p 101 The grid display The Utility menu command Grid overlays the wave form display with a grid based on the BPM tempo value This makes it easy to make loop settings that are synchronized to the tempo EE In the same way the grid display can also be used in 2 1 Sample Edit Edit2 page The grid can help you to edit the waveform in synchronization with the tempo CD Select the Utility menu command Grid The following dialog box will appear Grid le Grid Resolution Check Grid set Resolution as desired and press the F8 OK key The dotted grid lines will appear SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit2 Grid Tempo 6 E 6625465 LES Bee ILP 26 EM Cae Set J Grid Tempo to the desired BPM tempo value Set the end address so that it coincides with a dot ted line of the grid This will cause the loop interval to be the same length as the BPM value The grid display will be based at LpS Loop Start if looping is on If looping is off the grid will be based at S Start 4 To hide the grid display select the Utility menu command Grid uncheck Grid and press the F8 OK key A The grid is displayed according to the playback pitch of the base key the key shown in gray in the Keyboard amp Index area
260. on off data is recorded Step recording is suitable when you want to create a distinctive mechanical feel or when you want to 67 68 record phrases that would be impossible or too rapid to play live nofe Rapid phrases can also be recorded in realtime by temporarily slowing down the sequencer tempo Here s the procedure for step recording Press the MENU key to access the page menu Press the F5 key to select TEdit and press the F8 Open key The SEQ 5 2 Track Edit screen will appear Measure From Track Select TS CCh 88 SER 5 2 Track Edit Lead Synth From To End of M EER M 608 I UU Press the v key to set Track Select to T08 Ch 08 Lead Synth For this example we will input a lead performance using an analog synthesizer sound Press the a key to select Measure From and press the DEC key to set this to M 001 With this setting step recording will begin from measure 1 Press the F8 UTILITY key to display the Util ity menu press the F7 key or the cursor keys to select Step Recording and press the F8 OK key A dialog box will appear Step Rec Meter 474 Step F Duration aa5 Vel ET Meter 47 4 T68 Lead Synth M661 61 666 Memory 694 Free Crest Press the gt key to select Step Press the INC key or DEC key to select 16th note The step indicates the basic note value
261. op Start to set the loop start address and E End to set the end address The sample will sound as follows When looping is on 5 gt E gt LpS gt E gt continue repeating LpS gt E When looping is off 5 E Use the 44 gt to select S Start highlighted and use the VALUE dial etc to specify the location at which the sample will begin sounding The verti cal line in the display will move accordingly m As necessary you can press the F4 F7 keys to expand or shrink the waveform display Zoom will expand shrink the display starting at the selected S Start LpS Loop Start or E End points If you check Zero Use Zero locations where the waveform is at zero will automatically be found and selected when you use the VALUE dial etc to set S Start LpS Loop Start or E End points This makes it easy to set these points to addresses that will not produce clicks or noise SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit2 start acm Edit n LZR RII ry EIE S EHI PUT For this REDE set LpS Loop Start and S Start to the same value m If desired you can make a dotted vertical line appear in the sample waveform display to indicate the BPM If you use this function with waveforms that have a specific BPM it will be easier to make accurate settings for E End Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the utility menu and press the F7 key to select Grid Press the F8
262. ords using the program If this is set to Mono only one note will sound even if you play a chord Normally you will set this to Poly but it is effective to use Mono when you are playing sounds such as analog synth bass or synth lead Try switching between Poly and Mono and listen to the result OSC1 page OSC2 page PROG 2 1 lo 3 Level 127 iTranspose 00 Low ROM 666 R Piano iTune 188018 Os ofs ORev Level 127 Delay 96aams rare Loser Descr Wore O usi UNDA Specifies the multisample for oscillator 1 2 Selecting a multisample The multisample will determine the basic character of the program O Use High MS Bank to select the multisample bank and use High Multisample to select the multisample If the High MS Bank is ROM or EX you can select preset multisamples High Multisample can be selected from a range of ROM 000 424 EX 000 044 VNL If High MS Bank is RAM you can select multi samples that were created in Sampling mode or loaded in Media mode if the EXB SMPL option and sample data RAM is installed In High Multisam ple you can select from 000 999 m You can use the Utility Select by Category to select internal preset multisamples from 15 catego ries PG p 8 High Multisample and Low Multisample If you specify a High and Low multisample for an oscillator either the High or the Low multisample will sound depending on the velocity of the note i e the strength a
263. ore B osci Pite h Slope Loser Just si e J a Pitch The JS X and JS X settings specify the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when MIDI pitch bend messages are received or when the joystick is moved to left or right A setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave upward a setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave downward Ribbon 16 specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when MIDI control change CC 16 messages are received or when the ribbon controller of a TRITON or other MIDI con nected instrument is moved to left or right With a set ting of 12 the pitch will rise one octave at the far right of the ribbon controller and fall one octave downward at the far left of the ribbon controller Pitch EG When the Intensity value is set to 12 00 the pitch EG specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a maxi mum of 1 octave of pitch change Portamento If Enable is checked portamento will be applied Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when you play the next note before releasing the previous note The Time parameter specifies the portamento time As this value is increased the pitch will change over a longer time With a value of 000 there will be no porta mento If Porta 5W CC 65 is assigned as the function of SW1 or SW2 key the portamento effect can be
264. ormal value within the pattern If you fail to restore the normal value unnecessary control data may remain in a stuck position when you place the pattern in a song or use the RPPR function to play the pattern How ever the following control data will be automati cally reset to the following values when the song or RPPR function finishes playing the pattern or when playback is halted Controller Reset value Modulation 1 CC 01 00 zero Modulation 2 CC 02 00 zero Expression CC 11 127 max Ribbon controller CC 16 64 center Damper switch CC 64 Sostenuto switch CC 66 Soft switch CC 67 EG sustain level CC 70 Resonance level CC 71 EG release time CC 72 EG attack time CC 73 Low pass filter cutoff CC 74 EG decay time CC 75 LFO1 speed CC 76 LFO1 depth pitch CC 77 LFO1 delay CC 78 Filter EG intensity CC 79 SW1 modulation CC 80 SW2 modulation CC 81 85 ic functions mode 86 Sampling mode The separately sold EXB SMPL option can be installed in the TR to add high performance mono stereo sam pling functionality Features of EXB SMPL 48 kHz 16 bit linear mono stereo sampling The EXB SMPL includes a 16 Mbyte 72 pin SIMM sample data waveform data memory module When this memory is installed in the TR you can sample for approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds in monaural or approximate
265. orrespondence between notes and drum sounds will change Adjusting the BPM of multisamples or samples cre ated in Sampling mode requires the EXB SMPL option be installed If a timbre program uses multisamples or samples that you created in Sampling mode or loaded in Media mode to a specific BPM value you can use the Utility Detune BPM Adjust to call up a new specified BPM value This changes the BPM by changing the playback pitch PG p 38 Note timing and scale settings 3 2 Ed Param2 Other page COMBI 3 2 Ed Param2 Other Delay ms Flteub El keyb b Loter SS Delay ms Specifies the timing at which the program of each tim bre will sound Specify the time from when you play the keyboard until the program will sound If you select KeyOff for this parameter the timbre will sound when the note is released Use Prog s Scale Combi s Scale Specifies the scale for each timbre If you check Use Prog s Scale the scale specified by the program will be used Timbres for which this is not checked will use the Combi s Scale setting Layer and split settings 3 3 Ed Key Zone Indicates settings such as layer split and keyboard crossfade Key page Specifies the range of notes that will sound each tim bre Each area that sounds a timbre is referred to as a Key Zone By setting key zones you can create a com bination in which different programs sound in differ ent areas of the keyboard
266. other key play guitar chords all by specifying a different pattern and track for each key 88 la 88Keys y _____76Keys Keys C 1 61 Keys e Shutdown Keys a Pattern Assignable C 1 C2 Pattern P000 Track01 Drums Program 39 Pattern U000 Track02 Bass Program Pattern P001 Track01 Drums Program Pattern U001 Track02 Bass Program Pattern U002 Track03 Guitar Program M 31 Quick Start on with the RPPR Realtime Pattem Play Recording Playing 32 Simple program editing By operating the performance editor and the realtime controllers you can easily and intuitively modify the sound of a program Program editing refers to the process of modifying the parameters that make up a program in order to mod ify the sound or change the controller effect settings etc noe More detailed editing can be performed in PROG 2 1 Ed Basic 7 2 Ed MasterFx Performance Edit By using the eight sliders of the Performance Editor you can make overall adjustments to the sound When you move a slider multiple program parameters are adjusted simultaneously D Press the PROG key the key will light to enter Program mode Press the
267. ound monophonically set this either to Mono or LGT Legato Conversely set this to Poly if you wish to force a monophonic program to play polyphonically s PG p 37 OSC Select Normally you will set this to Both If the timbre is using a program whose Mode Oscilla tor Mode is Double and you want only OSC1 or OSC2 not both to sound set this to OSC1 only OSC1 will sound or OSC2 only OSC2 will sound Portamento Normally you will set this to PRG If you want the portamento setting specified for the program of the timbre to be forced off set this parame ter to Off Conversely if you want to forcibly turn the portamento on or to change the portamento time set this to a value of 001 127 to specify the portamento time 59 60 Pitch page Keyb ion sy on Fast bit Docs 12 12 i 13 0 66 rir ase J leiten J Transpose Detune BPM Adjust These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre e Ina layer type combination you can set two or more timbres to the same program and create a richer sound by using Transpose to shift their pitch apart by an octave or by using Detune to create a slight difference in pitch between the two e Insplit type combinations you can use Transpose to shift the pitch in semitone units of the programs specified for each key zone e If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum program use Detune If you change the Transpose setting the c
268. ousampledcanbeplayedimmediately fromthe keyboard of the TR or by pressing the AUDITION key It is also easy to convert sampled data into a program and use it as material for the TR s HI synthesis system Multisamples samples that have been converted into a program can be used in a combination or song The waveform can be viewed in the LCD screen and edited by a variety of waveform editing commands that include rate convert down sampling and reverse playback The following commands are also provided Time Slice This automatically detects the attack portions of a kick or snare etc in a rhythm loop sample a looped pattern of drums etc and divides it into separate rhythm instrument sounds A pattern correspond ing to the divided samples is created automatically so that you can immediately use the Sequencer mode RPPR function to play the pattern and adjust the tempo without changing the pitch You can also do things such as adjusting the pitch of only the snare replacing it with a different sample or chang ing the playback timing on the sequencer in this way creating a new rhythm loop based on the rhythm loop you started with Stereo samples are supported Time Stretch This lets you modify the tempo without changing the pitch of a sample You can select either Sustain ing suitable for sustain type instruments such as strings or vocals or Slice suitable for rhythm loops on decay type instruments such drums Ste re
269. p 60 If you wish to select a new song as the convert des tination use the numeric keys 0 9 to specify the song number and then press the ENTER key It is not necessary to set Set Length in the dialog box that appears at this time The number of measures in the converted song will be used Press the F8 OK key and the Convert Cue List dialog box will appear Convert Cue List C00 to Song 663 NEW SONG 3 Press the F8 OK key The cue list will be converted into a song Access the SEO 1 1 Play REC page select the song number that you specified as the conversion destination and check the results 001 HER OU Meter 4 4 Reso Hi ds 168 Ruto 003 NEW CUELIST 00 pt T81 E z standard kit cho Creating and recording RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record This section explains how to assign a pattern to RPPR and how to play and record Playing with the RPPR function p 31 Creating RPPR data D Create a new song p 71 2 Specify the program for each track For this example we will use a template song Use the Utility menu command Load Template Song to load P14 Hip Hop Rap It is not necessary to copy the patterns p 65 Select the SEQ 5 1 RPPR RPPR Setup page In this page the RPPR function is automatically turned on SER 5 1 RPPR RPPR Setup KE Pat Pre P121 HipHop 1 HipHop M angal on 00 uroa T91 Drums Sunc moa VV 4 Use KE
270. parameters in realtime You can also use MIDI Sync to synchronize the LFO speed or delay time to changes in the tempo ic functions mode You can assign names not only to the song but also to each pattern and track Combination settings can be copied to a song Sequencer data such as a song or cue list that you create can be saved in this instrument s native format or transmitted as a MIDI data dump A song you created can be converted into SMF Standard MIDI File data SMF songs can also be loaded The PLAY MUTE REC and SOLO On Off let you instantly play mute any desired track You can rewind or fast forward while listening to the sound The LOCATE key lets you move quickly to a desired location If the EXB SMPL sold separately option is installed multisamples you create can be played in Sequencer mode together with the internal programs The Time Slice function of Sampling mode lets you divide a rhythm loop sample and create perfor mance data that corresponds to the divided sam ples In Sequencer mode you can play this performance data and adjust the playback tempo without affecting the pitch of the rhythm loop sam ple You can also exchange the note numbers of the data or modify the timing to freely re create the original rhythm loop 63 The structure of Sequencer mode The following describes the structure of Sequencer mode see diagram below Songs A song consists of tracks 1 16 a
271. patterns Each song can have up to 100 patterns When using a pattern in a different song use the Utility menu commands Copy Pattern or Copy From Song etc to copy the pattern The pattern length can be specified in units of a measure Each pattern consists of musical data for one track It is not possible to create patterns that contain multiple tracks These patterns can be used as track musical data by being placed in a track Utility menu command Put to Track or copied to a track Utility menu command Copy to Track Alternatively you can use a pattern with the RPPR function of a song Cue List A cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in succession The TR allows you to create 20 cue lists Each cue list allows you to connect a maximum of 99 songs in any order and to specify the number of times that each song will repeat The page menu command Convert to Song lets you convert the two or more songs in a cue list into a single song This allows you to use a cue list to create the backing then convert the cue list into a song and add solo phrases on unused tracks Master Effect 1 2 7271 8 Pattern U00 U99 RPPR Setup Controller Setup 2 2 25 1 Arpeggiator 6 1 1 5 A B Track 1 Setup parameters Musical data gt Track 2 Setup parameters Musical data __ BUS 7 1 4
272. po without changing the pitch Here is an example of the procedure for time slicing a rhythm loop sample in Sampling mode and for play ing the resulting rhythm loop samples in Sequencer mode You can try this using a rhythm loop sample that con tains a drum performance You can record this on the TR or use Media mode to load data from SD card etc When trying this for the first time start with a fairly simple one measure 4 4 drum pattern In this example we are using a 120 BPM rhythm loop sample D Access the SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit1 page 2 In SMPL select a 120 BPM rhythm loop sample SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit1 Sample Select Index 661 661 E tinm idu es ELp Tune 66 Rev ZIM 4 TIEN 77 HII ST xx JL Edit m Play back the sample and check whether the beat plays accurately across the looped point If not access the SMPL 3 1 Loop Edit Edit2 page adjust S Start start address and E End end address and execute the Truncate utility menu command p 92 PG p 109 Choose the Time Slice utility menu command The Set Sample Tempo dialog box will appear Set Sample Tempo Source BPM YEET Specify the quarter note time signature and the tempo of the sample Beat 664 If you know the BPM set the Source BPM field If you do not know the BPM set Beat and the BPM will be calculated automatically In this example we already know the BPM so we will set
273. possible to select a sample in SMPL but since the sample assigned to each index can change you should use Index to select a sample Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the utility menu use the F7 key etc to select Rename SMPL and press the F8 OK key When the dialog box appears press the F5 Name key to access the text dialog box and assign the desired sample name Example It s Refer to step of Naming a multisample Select Index select the next sample that you want to name and use the utility menu command Rename SMPL to assign a name to that sample 37 Quick Start Sampling recording a sample 38 Saving sample data Here s how to save a sample or multisample that you created All samples and multisamples in the TR will be lost when the power is turned off Insert an SD card into the slot Alternatively make sure that settings are made correctly for a con nected external SCSI device Press the MEDIA key to select Media mode 3 Press the F2 Save key If you want to save to a different device use the media select setting Media to select the device on which you want to save the data Press the F8 UTILITY key to access the utility menu and press the F7 key to select Save Sam pling Data Press the F8 OK key to display the following dialog box Save Multisamples and Samples To NEMFILE
274. pplied to the external audio source con nected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks The effect section of the TR can be used as a 2 in 4 out effect pro cessor Routing In modes other than Sampling mode i e in Combina tion Program and Sequencer modes the audio input routing from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks is specified in the GLOBAL 1 1 System Audio In page D Enter Global mode from Program mode A If you enter Global mode from Sampling mode the Input 1 and Input 2 settings of Sampling mode will be maintained and you will not be able to hear the settings made in Global mode You must move here from a mode that can access exter nal audio signals Combination Program or Sequencer In Sampling mode the settings you make here are ignored AUDIO INPUT 1 2 set tings for Sampling mode are made by the Input 1 and Input 2 parameters in the In Pref page of SMPL 1 1 Recording p 114 PG p 128 Select the GLOBAL 1 1 System Audio In page inputi Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Pan L666 Send 666 Send2 666 Input2 Level 127 Pan R127 Sendi 666 Send2 666 rare Tiree J Foot ludi VISA 9 Set the parameters for Input1 and Input2 Input1 corresponds to AUDIO INPUT 1 jack and Input2 corresponds to AUDIO INPUT 2 jack Level Set the signal level from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 Normally you will set this to 127 If the sound is still distorted even when this level is lowered sig
275. pply an effect Normally this is used to control the pitch bend up JS X Move the joystick toward the left to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the pitch bend down JS Y Move the joystick away from yourself to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the oscillator LFO vibrato JS Y Move the joystick toward yourself to apply an effect Normally this is used to control filter LFO wah fe You can use the Lock function of SW 1 or SW 2 keys to hold the effect in the current joystick posi tion before the joystick is released to the center position For the procedure refer to The lock function ES You can use the joystick as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation to con trol program parameters or effect parameters SW 1 SW2 swl SW2 You can use these keys as sources for alternate modula tion or effect dynamic modulation to control program parameters or effect parameters These switches can also be used to switch the octave to turn portamento on off or to lock the position of the after touch lock function p 25 You can specify the way in which the SW1 and SW2 keys will operate either Toggle when the assigned function will be switched on off each time the key is pressed or Momentary when the assigned function will be switched on only as long as you hold down the key m The function of the SW1 and SW2 keys can be verified for
276. pproximately 0 02083 mS millisecond The higher the sampling frequency is the closer to the original analog signal the waveform in memory will be Each level is read and converted into digital data The accuracy at this time is determined by the bit resolu tion This process converts an analog signal with infi nite resolution into a digital signal with finite resolution With 16 bit resolution each level is indi cated in 65 536 steps the sixteenth power of two The greater the bit resolution is the closer to the origi nal analog signal the waveform in memory will be 48 kHz 16 bit sampling is the same quality as in audio devices such as DAT A CD uses 44 1 kHz 16 bit sam pling which is a slightly lower sampling frequency Samples and Multisamples Samples The data that is recorded sampled into internal mem ory or loaded from a file is referred to as a sample or sample file Samples consist of the actual waveform data and parameters that specify how the data will be played back such as Start Loop Start and End Address Samples can be used in multisamples and drum kits The TR can hold a maximum of 4 000 samples in its internal memory hotel The TR can share a single waveform among multi ple samples This allows you to create multiple samples with different playback addresses from the same waveform without wasting internal memory For example suppose that you have waveform data that records a voice sayin
277. ram parameters but normally rotating the knob toward the left will darken the sound and rotating it toward the right will brighten it Level 1 i t i LPF 1 Frequency f Low Cutoff High frequency lt lt Knob 2 RESONANCE HPF Adjust the resonance level of a low pass filter or the cutoff frequency of a high pass filter The content that is controlled will depend on the filter type specified by the program By adjusting the filter resonance level you can increase or decrease the resonance level to add a unique charac ter to the sound A mn Adjusting the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter will modify the thickness of the sound from which the low frequency range has been filtered out Quick Start Level LPF HPF Cutoff frequency Knob 3 EG IN TEN SITY Adjust the filter EG intensity the depth at which the filter EG is applied Rotating the knob will affect the depth of the filter EG Normally rotating the knob toward the left will make the filter EG apply less deeply and rotating it toward the right will make the filter EG apply more deeply Since the filter EG will operate based on the cutoff fre quency of the filter knobs 1 and 3 will work together to control the tonal changes produced by the filter Using controllers to modify the sound Level Time Y Knob 4 EG RELEASE Adjust the EG release times of the filter and amp This will deter
278. rameters refer to PG p 213 113 Effect settings in combination and song In Combination and Sequencer modes you can spec ify the routing of each timbre track to the insert effect and master effects These settings are made in the same way in each of these modes We will be using the example of Combination mode in our explanation here Routing Select the COMBI 7 1 Ed InsertFX BUS page COMBI 7 1 Ed InsertFx BUS BUS Select Elstrin Py strin Estrin strin Ra eso E PLUR L R i LAR DDR In BUS Select specify where the output of each timbre will be sent S1 Send1 MFX1 S2 Send2 MFX2 speci fies the send level from each timbre to the master effects This can be set only if BUS Select is set to L R or Off The actual send level will be the send level of each timbre multiplied by the send level of each oscilla tor of the program selected for the timbre If the send level of a program is 0 the actual level will be zero even if the send level setting is raised here If IFX is selected for BUS Select set the send lev els to the master effects by adjusting the S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 parame ters COMBI 7 1 Ed Insert FX Setup page located after the signal has passed through the insert effect Insert effect Setup insert Effect gt C864 L R 51 127 52 127 iG ch IF e st Esct Enhcr 123456788 eas setup Se T TLT
279. re pre served as long as the power remains on but will be lost if not written to memory before the power is turned off The data handled in Global mode can be classified into three types user drum kit set tings GLOBAL 5 1 user arpeggio pattern settings GLOBAL 6 1 and all other global settings GLO BAL 1 14 1 Each of these three types of data can be written into the memory area In Media mode this data can also be saved on external media such as an SD card p 45 A Global mode does not provide a Compare function that lets you make before and after comparisons of your editing Before editing user drum kits or user arpeggio patterns you may wish to use Copy Drum Kit or Copy Arpeggio Pattern to copy the user drum kit or user arpeggio pattern to an unused number Creating a drum kit About drum kits A drum kit consists of drum samples PCM drum waveform data assigned to each note with individual adjustments for pitch and level etc This instrument has 24 drum kit memory areas With the factory settings 00 INT 15 INT contain pre loaded drum kits suitable for a variety of musical styles 24 GM 32 GM contain nine different preset drum kits that are compatible with the GM2 sound map For details on the factory set drum kits refer to VNL In GLOBAL 5 1 DKit you can edit these drum kits to create your own original drum kits You can also create original drum kits using sample waveforms that you sa
280. re4 Insert Effect Program J 1 Master Effect Individual Outputs Parameters Timbre8 Parameters Controller Setup 2 2 Arpeggiator 6 1 7 2 1 3 MasterEQ 7 2 4 gt AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO R AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 7 1 1 or 7 2 1 etc indicate pages or tab screens used on this instrument for editing ic functions Combination mode 57 58 Layer split and velocity switch Within a combination you can use keyboard location and velocity to change the program that sounds The programs assigned to each timbre can sound in three ways as a layer a split or a velocity switch A combi nation can be set to use any one of these methods or to use two or more of these methods Layer Layer refers to settings which cause two or more pro grams to sound simultaneously when a note is played Program A Program B Layer Two or more programs sound simultaneously Split Split refers to settings which cause different programs to sound on different areas of the keyboard Program A HUTT Velocity Switch refers to settings which cause different programs to sound depending on the velocity key board playing dynamics Split Different programs will sound in different areas of t
281. ructure of Sequencer mode 64 SOBBS s iren E ee 64 Patterns re aai iiai 64 Cue LISt i a a EAER AE 64 Producing a song e 65 Creating the basic song sssss 65 Song editing methods 71 Creating and playing a Cue List 73 Creating and recording RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record 75 Creating RPPR data sss 75 RPPR playback see 76 Realtime recording an RPPR performance sss 76 Recording the sound of a combination or program nnns 77 Auto Song Setup function 77 Copy From Combi Sequencer mode page menu commands sss 78 Caution and other functions in Sequencer mode siis rrr ar 80 Recording on the TR eeeeee 81 Recording a track and recording a pattern 81 Sampling mode 86 Features of EXB SMPL ne 86 How Sampling mode is organized 87 In Sampling mode ss 87 Samples and Multisamples 87 Sampling enne 88 Preparations for sampling 88 Manual sampling sse 89 Auto sampling 0 cscs 90 Creating multisample indexes and sampling needed ee 91 Loop settings ennnnnn 92 The grid display sss 92 Sample waveform data editing
282. s 4 8 to set drumsample parameters for each note number If you wish to use the settings of another KEY select the Utility Copy Key Setup Select the Voice Mixer page in GLOBAL 5 1 DKit GLOBAL 5 1 Dkit Voice Mixer Exclusive Group Drum Kit BBCINT gt Standard Kit 1 F 4 r Rssian Level H 56 L 44 Cisingle Tria Enable Note on Excl Group Enable Note Off K A JL Low Musical d Vel Su LH 185 Pan R o4 51 000 BUS L R S2 817 DIES Gorka UIN Set the Excl Group Exclusive Group The Excl Group Exclusive Group setting is used when you wish to group drumsamples of the same type For example if the note number to which a open hi hat and a closed hi hat drumsample are assigned are set to the same exclusive group number they will be grouped so that the open hi hat and closed hi hat can not be sounded simultaneously ensuring that the hi hat performance will sound natural 2 Use BUS to specify the output routing Set this when you wish to send the output of the drumsample assigned to each note number to its own insert effect or AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVID UAL jack 1 2 For example you can specify IFX for snare type sounds and L R for the other sounds If you want to send only a specific drum sample to AUDIO OUT PUT INDIVIDUAL 1 and or 2 select 1 2 or 1 2 These settings are valid if Use DKit Setting PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFX BUS page is checked for the program that uses this
283. s global settings drum kits user arpeggio patterns the data specified by the S Item Select Save Items check boxes when sav ing will be saved e SNG files Songs cue lists e KSC files Script file KSC files listing the multisamples and samples created in Sampling mode if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed with multisam ples KMP files and samples KSF files Standard MIDI files SMF A single pattern of Sequencer mode can be saved as SMF data e System exclusive data System exclusive data received by the TR from an external MIDI device the TR can be used as a data filer WAVE files AIFF files Samples you created in Sampling mode if the sepa rately sold EXB SMPL option is installed can be exported and saved as WAVE files or AIFF files nole For details on each type of file and the icon associ ated with it refer to the lower diagram on p 101 Arpeggiator settings This chapter describes the procedure for making P000 UP arpeggiator settings in each mode For details on the arpeggiator function refer to Using the arpeggiator T 6 while you play p 27 24 Arpeggiator settings for a pro gram P001 DOWN v ec 0 0000000000000000000000009 wm Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the ARP ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on or off When on the H ARP ON OFF key will light W
284. s correspond to the Pitch Filter and Amplifier settings of the program In other words you would adjust the Pitch settings to modify the pitch the Filter settings to modify the tone and the Amplifier settings to modify the volume In Oscillator Oscillator 2 1 Ed Basic settings you select the waveform multisample that determines the basic sound and specify its pitch This sound is then modified by the pitch settings Pitch 3 1 Ed Pitch fil ter settings Filter 4 1 4 2 Ed Filter and amp settings Amplifier 5 1 5 2 Ed Amp to create the basic sound of the program This basic sound can then be modified further by using insert effect 7 1 Ed InsertFX settings master effects and master EQ 7 2 Ed MasterFX settings to apply finishing touches When arpeggiator settings 6 1 Ed Arp and controller settings 2 2 Ed Ctrl are added to this the final result is called a program m Programs that are used in Combination mode or Sequencer mode have insert effect master effect master EQ arpeggiator and controller settings that are separate from those of Program mode The Compare function As you are editing a program you can use the COM PARE key to listen to the previously saved version of the sound as it was before you began editing Press the COMPARE key the key light comes on to hear the original version Pressing COMPARE again the light goes dark returns you to the version you are edit ing
285. s is used to control volume or the speed or sensitivity of the EG After Touch This effect can be applied by varying pressure on a key that is already being held down Normally this is used to control volume tone cutoff frequency or LFO sensitivity etc Note Number Varying amounts of an effect will be applied depend ing on the position of the key on the keyboard Normally this is used to control volume tone cutoff frequency LFO sensitivity and EG sensitivity etc noe This can be used as a source for alternate modula tion or effect dynamic modulation to control pro gram parameters or effect parameters Foot pedals Damper Pedal A separately sold Korg switch type damper pedal such as the DS 1H can be connected to this instrument If a DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal The half damper function cannot be controlled by other pedals Assignable Foot Switch A separately sold on off switch such as the Korg PS 1 foot switch can be connected to this instrument allow ing you to turn an assigned function on off by step ping on the foot switch The function of the foot switch is assigned in GLOBAL 1 1 System Foot SW Assign p 117 Assignable Foot Pedal A separately sold Korg expression pedal such as the EXP 2 foot controller or XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal can be connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack and used to apply an effect The function of the foot pedal is assigned in
286. s the 1 key GLOBAL 6 1 fArp Pattern 7 Edit When you play the keyboard as shown in the illustration the arpeggiator will begin playing Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of chord you play on the keyboard If Sort is unchecked it will correspond to the pitch of the first note you play Likewise Tone 1 is the next highest pitch played on the keyboard and so on up to 12 tones in any one step 108 For steps 01 08 make settings for Ptch Pitch Off set Gt Gate Vel Velocity and Flam Ptch Pitch Offset This offsets the pitch of the arpeggio note in semitones up or down You can input the same tone for each step and change the Ptch Pitch Offset value for each to create a mel ody using a single tone Melody pattern Gt Gate Specify the length of the arpeggio note for each step With a setting of LGT the note will continue sounding either until the next note of the same tone or until the end of the pattern With a set ting of Off the note will not sound Vel Velocity Specify the strength of the note With a setting of Key the note will sound at the strength with which it was actually played A The Gt Gate and Vel Velocity settings you make here will be valid if the Gt Gate and Vel Velocity parameters PROG 6 1 Ed Arp Arpeg Setup page of the program selected in Pro gram mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting ot
287. s the REC WRITE key 3 Specify the recording method Auto D In the lower left of the SMPL 1 1 Recording Input Pref page select the Auto Loop On check box and press the DEC key to un check it 2 Press the F2 Rec key to select the SMPL 1 1 Recording Recording page SMPL 1 1 Recording Recording Pre Trigger REC Sample Setup Bank 1 Mode L Mono Time 67 3765 ampil ges Jngrreg SSC In REC Setup set Mode REC Mode to Auto and set Threshold to 30 With this setting recording will begin automatically when the audio input reaches 30 dB or higher in record ready mode 35 Quick Start Sampling recording a sample Set Pre Trigger to 5 ms With this setting sample recording will begin 5 ms earlier than i e immediately before sampling is actually triggered so that the very beginning of the sound is not lost As an alternative to the Auto setting for Mode REC Mode you can set this to Manual and record manually p 39 In Sample Setup set Mode Sampling Mode to L Mono With this setting the internal L channel will be sam pled in mono 4 Create a multisample and indexes D Press the F1 Sample key to select the SMPL 1 1 Recording Sample page Immediately after the power has been turned on 000 will be selected as the multisample MS TE Index 801 981 so Miki TE E EE es SMPL No Rssign OrigK C2 TopkK N
288. s you create here can be used by specify ing the scale for a program for each timbre of a combi nation or for each track of a song Changing the scale Changing the scale You can specify the scale for each program for each timbre in a combination or for each track of a song Sequencer mode These settings are made by Type in the following pages and by Use Program s Scale for a combination or sequencer PROG 2 1 Ed Basic Prog Basic Combination mode COMBI 3 2 Ed Param2 Other SEQ 3 2 Param2 Other Othr 8 Othr 16 Sequencer mode Here we will show how to make settings in Sequencer mode D Press the SEO key to enter Sequencer mode 2 Press the MENU key and then press the F3 key to select Prm2 Press the F8 Open key 3 Select the F1 Othr 8 key or the F2 Othr 16 key If you wish to use the scale that is specified for the program used by a track check the Use Prog s Scale check box for that track Tracks that are not checked will use the scale speci fied by Scale Type Set Type Song s Scale to select the scale for the entire currently selected song m If you wish to keep this setting after the power is turned off you must Write the Global settings to memory rs p 43 Setting the function of SW 1 and SW 2 You can specify the function of the SW1 and SW2 keys PG p 224 The functions of the SW1 and SW2 keys are
289. sary if the two arpeggiators use the same MIDI channel amp Depending on the combination settings it may also be necessary to change the track settings as well In the screens shown above combination B071 In the Pocket has been copied using Copy From Com bination As described in steps 1 and 2 of the proce dure given earlier try actually copying this to see for yourself For the arpeggiator settings of this combina tion refer to p 105 Taking this setting as an example determine whether correction is necessary and if nec essary what needs to be corrected Arpeggiator Run A and B are checked and MIDI Channel 01 and 02 are selected Corrections must be made Correction is necessary for one of the arpeggia tors If you perform multi track recording with these settings the MIDI channels of T01 02 03 04 05 and 06 are the same so the low register bass T01 and T02 the high register synth brass pad T03 T04 and T06 and the synth mallet played by arpeggiator B T05 will have their performance data combined into one stream and the performance will not be reproduced at playback T08 is a dummy track used to trigger arpeg giator A ic functions mode D So that the synth mallet played by arpeggiator A can be recorded separately change the MIDI chan nel of T05 Select the SEQ 3 1 Param1 MIDI T01 08 page and change the T05 MIDI Channel to 03 2 Add settings for triggering arpeggia
290. scillator settings match each other When Oscillator Mode Drums PROG 2 1 Ed Basic OSC1 Drum Kit Cctave 1 167 iTranspose 00 iTune iDelay Boga ms isl 0010 pilem O o e A In the Basic Prog Basic page set Mode Oscillator Mode to Drums When this is set to Drums you will be able to create a drum program This will select a drum kit instead of a multisample This instrument provides sixteen factory preset drum kits that are suitable for a wide variety of music Drumkit name VNL Here you can only select a drum kit To edit or create a drum kit use GLOBAL 5 1 DKit p 98 The following multisamples or drum kits can be used for the oscillator 470 internal preset multisamples ROM EX Multisamples RAM created in Sampling mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed You can create programs using multisamples sam ples that were sampled in Sampling mode or loaded in Media mode Nine internal drum kits ROM 24 user drum kits created in Global mode Drum samples can be freely assigned to each key to create a drum kit For the sound of each key you can make filter and amp settings and specify routing to the effects and to the individual audio outputs V Zone Velocity Zone page PROG 2 1 Ed Basic Vel Zone 0SC2 Bottom OSC1 Velocity Zone Bottom 661 Top 127 OSC2 Velocity Zone Bottom H Top 127 gaze JLeser peser S LiT Here you can specify the ra
291. set independently for each program combination and song In and Sampling mode the functions of these keys are set for the entire mode You can specify the function that will be performed by the SW1 and SW2 keys and can also select between Toggle when the function will be switched on off each time the SW1 or SW2 key is pressed and Momentary when the function will be on only while you continue holding the SW1 or SW2 key These settings are made by SW1 2 Assign in the fol lowing pages Program mode PROG 2 2 Ed Ctrl Controls Combination mode COMBI 2 2 Ed Ctrl Controls Sequencer mode SEQ 2 2 Controller Controls Sampling mode SMPL 5 2 Controller Controls If the EXB SMPL option is installed n When you write a program or combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 keys is mem orized You can use these keys as alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation sources and control program parameters or effect parameters In this case you will normally select SW1 Mod CC 80 and SW2 Mod CC 81 For an example in which the SW1 key is specified as an effect dynamic modulation source for a program and used to control an effect refer to p 116 noel If you wish to keep this setting after the power is turned off you must Write the Global settings to memory rs p 43 note The settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved Setting the B mode functions of REALTIME C
292. sing the key The volume of a note on a violin or wind instru ment can be varied during the note by the musician i e by regulating the amount of pressure on the bow or the force of the breath Volume Piano Volume Organ Volume remains constant Volume decays gradually until note is released gt gt Time Time Lvl Pan Level Pan page PROG 5 1 Ed fimpi Level Pan Amp1 Level Ouse Dkit Setting Intensity 40 Lore on Hed ee fr Amp1 Level Amp2 Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Pan Specifies the pan stereo position after the signal has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Nor mally you will set this to C064 If Mode Oscillator Mode is Double and you wish to create a sense of stereo set the 5 1 Ed Amp1 and 5 2 Ed Amp2 param eter Pan to left and right for oscillators 1 and 2 respectively With a setting of Random the pan will change randomly each time you play a note on this instrument producing an interesting effect AMS Intensity Intensity specifies the depth of the panning effect that will occur when AMS is operated If you set AMS to Note No the pan will change according to the keyboard position at which you play a note on a this instrument With a setting of LFO1 or 2 the pan will sweep from side to side auto pan Other settings allow you to move the oscillator pan
293. slot or an external SCSI device if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed e Media such as an SD card or hard drive EXB SMPL option required can be formatted and then data can be managed by copying etc Korg format AKAI AIFF and WAVE format sample data can be loaded Sample data can also be saved in Korg format or exported in AIFF or WAVE format if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed e Songs that you created in Sequencer mode can be saved in SMF format SMF files can be loaded as Sequencer mode songs Youcan use the Data Filer function to save load MIDI exclusive data Sampling mode If the EXB SMPL option is installed Anexternal audio device or mic connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT jacks can be sampled recorded as a sample An insert effect can also be applied to the select input sound while it is being sampled Waveform data that was sampled or loaded in Media mode can be modified using a variety of editing functions such as adjusting the loop point using Time Slice or Time Stretch Youcan edit multisamples which consist of multiple samples Youcan convert a multisample into a program When this conversion is performed a multisample created in Sampling mode can be used in Program Combination and Sequencer modes Front and rear panel 5 Front panel Front and rear panel
294. sound thinner However if the cutoff fre quency Frequency is raised excessively high the vol ume will become very low High Pass Level 12dB oct Frequency Resonance When Resonance is set to a higher value the over tones in the region of the cutoff frequency will be boosted as shown in the diagram below giving a dis tinctive character to the sound Mod 1 Mod 2 page PROG 4 1 Ed Filter1 Mod 1 KBEDTrk Key Low Keyboard Track Key Low RRR High G 1 Int to A 49 B 49 Ramp Low 86 High 16 Filter EG Int to A 66 to B 66 AMS JS 62 Vel to A 37 to B 431 iint to A 15 B 15 acre Woods Moaz Iieomodl_ec_ gn Controllers and the filter EG can be used to modulate the filter cutoff frequency that was specified in the Basic page By using a controller to vary the tone or by using an EG to create time varying changes you can add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound Basic functions Keyboard Track Mod 1 page This varies the cutoff frequency according to the posi tion of the key on the keyboard that you play e When Ramp Low is set to a positive value the cutoff frequency will rise as you play lower on the keyboard making the sound brighter When set to a negative value the cutoff frequency will fall as you play lower on the keyboard making the sound darker When Ramp High is set to a positive value the cutoff frequency will rise as you play higher
295. sound will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R IFX The output will be sent to insert effect IFX 1 2 1 2 The output will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 or 2 It will not be sent to the insert effect the master effects or the master EQ Off The output will not be sent to AUDIO OUT PUT MAIN L MONO R or to INDIVIDUAL 1 2 After passing through the master effects it will be output from AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN Select this when you wish to connect the output to the master effects in a series connection at the send levels spec ified by MFX Send MEX Send specifies the send level from each oscillator to the master effects This is valid only if BUS Select All OSCs is set to L R or Off If IFX is selected for BUS Select All OSCs the send level to the master effects is adjusted by the Send 1 MFX1 and Send 2 MFX2 parameters PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFX Setup page after the signal has passed through the insert effect Insert effect D Access the PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFX Setup page The Setup page displays the state of the routing and insert effect settings In this page you can also make BUS Select settings Use the La v cursor keys to select All OSCs and use the INC DEC keys to make the setting Setup insert Effect mae gt C664 L R 51 127 52 127 PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFx FH e st GraphicTEQ eas 1 setup JF VEA 2 In Insert Effect s
296. st be turned off Memory protect The user arpeggio pattern settings Tempo Pat tern Octave Resolution Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard are parameters that are set independently in Program Combination and Song These settings are not saved when you perform the Write operation described here If you moved from Program or Combination mode and set these parameters you must return to the original mode and write them Using a Utility menu command to write D To write global settings the various settings in GLOBAL 1 1 4 1 select the Utility Write Global Setting in GLOBAL 1 14 1 and press the F8 OK key The Write Global Setting dialog box will appear Urite Global Setting To write user drum kits select the Utility Write Drum Kits in GLOBAL 5 1 and press the F8 OK key The Write Drum Kits dialog box will appear Write Drum Kits Bl To write user arpeggio patterns select the Utility Write Arpeggio Patterns in GLOBAL 6 1 and press the F8 OK key The Write Arpeggio Patterns dialog box will appear The example shown is for Write Arpeggio Patterns Urite firpeggio Patterns n The same dialog box will also appear if in each of the above pages you hold down the ENTER key and press the 0 key 2 To execute the Write operation press the F8 OK Key To cancel press the F7 Cancel key When you press the
297. t the tuning so that the pitch matches To adjust the tuning use GLOBAL 1 1 Sys tem Basic page Master Tune The tuning can be adjusted in a range of 50 50 cents one semitone is 100 cents You can also transpose by changing the pitch in semi tone steps To transpose the pitch of the entire this instrument use GLOBAL 1 1 System Basic page Key Transpose The pitch can be transposed over a range of 1 octave Here we will explain how to adjust the tuning and transposition of the entire this instrument in Global mode D Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode Press the EXIT key 3 Press the F1 Basic key To adjust the tuning select Master Tune to adjust the transposition select Key Transpose Use the VALUE controllers to adjust the setting You can use numeric keys 0 9 to enter a value and press the ENTER key Alternatively you can use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys If you wish to keep this setting after the power is turned off you must Write the Global settings to memory rs p 43 Bypassing the effects Normally effects are turned on off within each pro gram combination or song or in Sampling mode However if you want the entire instrument to not use any effects you can use this Global bypass feature D Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode Press the EXIT key Press the F1 Basic key 4 To turn off insert effect check the
298. t uses a drum kit Mode Oscilla tor Mode Drums and then move to the GLOBAL 5 1 DKit page ic functions Global mode 97 98 Editing a drum kit Before editing a drum kit uncheck the Memory Protect vs p 43 D In PROG 1 1 Play select the program that you wish to use while editing the drum kit Select a drum kit program from the preload pro grams etc If the drum kit that you will be editing is already being used by a program select that pro gram In the separate VNL programs that use a drum kit are marked by a symbol amp Set Octave PROG 2 1 2 to 0 8 With a set ting other than 0 8 the relationship between the keys and the sounds will be incorrect The effects will sound using the settings of the last selected program When you edit a drum kit all programs that use that drum kit will be affected Access the High Sample page of GLOBAL 5 1 DKit GLOBAL 5 1 DKit High Sample Drum Kit Drum Kit GENT SRT ETT ETS EE RRERGRELRERLRERLELR ROL LERGLELLERGLELGOLL RELL ERG RELL ELGG ELLELALELLELRLELL OLE C4 MiAssign Level H 439 L 99 Vel SW L3H 675 High ROM 6661 BD Dru 2 Trans Tune 56 Fc 66 Reso 66 Rt 4880 Dc 405 Hi mS EIS ULIS Key Drumsample Bank Drumsample 3 In Drum Kit select the drum kit that you wish to edit If necessary use the Utility Copy Drum Kit to copy settings from a preload
299. t which you play the keyboard This func tion is called velocity multisample switching D Specify different multisamples for High Multi sample and Low Multisample Specify a velocity value for Velocity SW LH Notes played on the keyboard at a velocity less than the value you specify will sound the Low multisam ple velocities at or above this velocity value will sound the High multisample For example if you set Velocity SW LH to 100 playing the keyboard softly will sound the Low multisample and playing strongly will sound the High multisample Adjust the Level for High and Low multisam ples to set their volume balance If you do not wish to use this function set the Velocity SW L gt H value to 001 Only the High multisample will sound Rev Reverse check box If this is checked the multisample will be played back ward This can produce interesting results when used on sound effects etc Normally you will not check this When Oscillator Mode Double To use OSC2 set Mode Oscillator Mode to Double in the Basic Prog Basic page In the same way as for OSC1 you can set High and Low multisamples for OSC2 The playback pitch can be set independently By using the same multisample with slightly different Tune settings you can detune the oscillators to produce a richer sound n It will be convenient to use the Utility Copy Oscillator to make the o
300. tabs that are displayed in each page They are also used to execute utilities and other functions Timbre track select T1 T9 T8 T16 keys By holding down the TIMBRE TRACK key and pressing a T1 T9 T8 T16 key you can select the timbre track parameters corresponding to the key number When a single page displays the parameters for tim bres 1 8 of a Combination or for tracks 1 8 9 16 of Sequencer mode these keys select one of these tim bres tracks 8 LCD screen Here you can select pages and parameters and set val ues p 10 9 VALUE controllers The following VALUE controllers are used to set the value of the selected parameter p 16 VALUE dial Use this dial to modify the value of the parameter IN C DEC keys These are used to increase or decrease the parameter value in steps of one It is convenient to use these to make fine adjustments Numeric keys 0 9 EN TER key key HOLD key Use these keys to numerically input a parameter value Use numeric keys 0 9 the key and the HOLD key to enter the value and press the ENTER key to confirm it The HOLD key lets you input a value with a decimal point The key inverts the sign of the parameter value In addition HOLD can be used if you wish to select sounds by category in program or combination mode By holding down the ENTER key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you ca
301. te on their own timing Synchronization between the arpeg giators and sequencer in Sequencer mode W hen song playback is stopped The arpeggiator will synchronize to the Tempo based on the timing of the internal MIDI clock n Sequencer mode when an RPPR pattern is playing the arpeggiator will synchronize to the beats of that pattern f you want the RPPR pattern playback to synchronize to the currently running arpeggiator set Sync SEQ 5 1 RPPR RPPR Setup page to SEQ Playback will synchronize to the J Tempo timing of the arpeggiator W hen a song is being played or recorded The arpeggiator will synchronize to the beats based on the timing of the song Synchronization with Song Start When the arpeggiator is on the ARP ON OFF key is on and running receiving a Song Start message will reset the arpeggiator to the beginning of the pattern This has no relation to the Key Sync setting n Sequencer mode when the Key Sync setting is unchecked and the ARP ON OFF key is on starting the arpeggiator by pressing notes during the pre count before recording will cause the arpeggiator to start and be recorded from the beginning of the arpeggio pattern at the moment that recording begins Synchronization with an external sequencer in Program Combination or Sequencer modes In Program Combination and Sequencer modes when Tempo is EXT GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Clock set to E
302. that controls the playback Atrack play loop function lets you loop specified measures independently for each track 150 preset patterns ideal for drum tracks are built in In addition you can create up to 100 user patterns for each song These patterns can be used as musical data within a song or can be played by the RPPR function Various methods of recording are supported including realtime recording in which your performance on the keyboard and controllers including MIDI control events is recorded just as you play and step recording in which the timing length and velocity of each note can be specify in the LCD as you input the pitches from the keyboard The musical data and control events that you recorded can be edited in various ways including event editing and many other edit commands When the Status of a track is set to INT or BTH an external sequencer can be used to play this instrument as a multi timbral tone generator When the Status of a track is set to BTH EXT or EXT2 the sequencer of this instrument can play external tone generators Playback can be synchronized with an external MIDI device This instrument s AMS Alternate Modulation capability lets you use control changes for realtime control of the parameters of the programs used in a program Its MIDI Sync functionality lets you synchronize the LFO speed to changes in the tempo Dmod Dynamic Modulation functionality lets you control effect
303. the 0 key Set Ptch Pitch Offset to 00 4 Set Step Step No to 04 and press the 0 key Set Ptch Pitch Offset to 00 Set Step Step No to 05 and press the 0 key Set Ptch Pitch Offset to 12 6 For Step Step No 06 do not enter a tone Set Step Step No to 07 and press the 0 key Set Ptch Pitch Offset to 00 Set Step Step No to 08 and press the 0 key Set Ptch Pitch Offset to 02 CD Set Step Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Gt Gate to LGT 2 For Step Step No 02 do not enter a tone Set Step Step No to 03 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys 4 Set Step Step No to 04 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys 8 For Step Step No 05 do not enter a tone Set Step Step No to 06 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys Set Gt Gate to LGT 2 For Step Step No 07 do not enter a tone Set Step Step No to 08 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys ES To simulate the timing nuances of a strummed guitar chord select Flam In Program mode select an acoustic guitar program and choose the user arpeggio pattern that you created here In the Setup page of PROG 6 1 Ed Arpeg set Gate to Step Then return to the GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern Edit page For odd numbered steps set Flam to a positive value For even numbered steps set Fl
304. the F8 UTILITY key to access the Utility menu This contains various commands for editing tracks and measures Select Set Song Length and press the F8 OK key Basic functions mode 71 72 A dialog box will appear Set Song Length Input the number of measures for the song For this example select 008 8 measures and press the F8 OK key The performance data from measures 1 8 will remain and the data of subsequent measures will be deleted When you press the START STOP key to play the song playback will stop at the end of the 8th measure Length EEE If you are using Track Play Loop check whether the measures specified for Loop Start Meas and Loop End Meas would be deleted If they would be deleted use Move Measure PG p 79 etc to move the data into the playback area before you execute this operation Mute tracks Press the EXIT key to select SEQ 1 1 Play REC and access the Program page Mute all tracks other than tracks 3 and 4 When you play back you will hear only the electric piano and guitar performances SE 1 1 Play REC Program PLAY MUTE REC 001 LR 000 mes 4 4 Reso Hi gj 185 Manu i Slow i B20 Pss peA RIE DE E ses Ore TOS E037 Fro Duno EF T98 Lead Suh play RECIL SJiproa 16 As described in steps set song S001 VERSE to 008 8 measures making it an eight measure song Then mute all tracks other tha
305. the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key If you play notes on the keyboard during the count in the arpeggio will begin at the same time that recording begins and then that pattern will be recorded mode Play the keyboard for about 16 measures and record your performance Press the START STOP key to stop recording If you made a mistake or would like to re record you can use the Compare function press the COM PARE key to re record as many times as you wish hotel The arpeggio pattern is recorded as the note data that was generated If you operate ARP GATE or ARP VELOCITY while recording an arpeggio pat tern this data will be recorded but it will not be possible to add changes by overdubbing ARP GATE or ARP VELOCITY data afterward for those notes 5 Recording other tracks CD As described in Recording the bass track use Track Select to select T03 Elec Piano and record about 16 measures 6 Step recording The TR provides two main methods of recording a song The first is realtime recording in which your performance on the keyboard and operations of the joystick and other controllers are recorded in realtime This is how we recorded the bass and electric piano tracks in the preceding sections The second method is step recording in which you can specify the timing note length and velocity etc in the LCD screen and use the keyboard to input the pitch of the note only the note
306. the Korg PS 1 foot switch can be connected here p 13 Its function can be assigned in Global mode allowing you to use the foot switch as a modulation controller to select programs or combinations or to start stop the sequencer rs p 117 DAMPER jack A separately sold switch type pedal such as the Korg DS 1H damper pedal can be connected here If a DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal In order to ensure that the half damper pedal functions correctly please adjust the polarity and the sensitivity PG p 126 128 If any other switch type pedal is connected it will function as a damper switch Set the polarity according to the pedal that you con nected x PG p 128 7 MIDI MIDI IN connector Musical data and sound settings etc are received at this connector Use this to play TR from another connected MIDI device PG p 233 MIDI OUT connector Musical data and sound settings etc are transmitted from this connector Use this to control another connected MIDI device from TR PG p 233 If MIDI data is being transmitted from the TR via USB to your computer transmission from the MIDI OUT connector is halted MIDI THRU connector Musical data and sound settings etc that are received at the MIDI IN connector are re transmitted without change from the MIDI THRU connector You can use this to connect multiple MIDI devices via MIDI cables PG p 233 8 EXB SMPL If the separately sol
307. the keyboard amp Index is the range of the selected index Press the F6 CREATE key several times Each time you press it an index will be created The key board display will indicate the zone and original key location of each index The highlighted area is the currently selected index Ey The index that is created when you press the F6 CREATE key will be created according to the 1 1 Recording Input Pref page Create settings These settings can also be made in 4 1 Multisam ple Pref page Create Zone Preference PG p 95 120 SMPL 1 1 Recording Input Pref 2one Range inputi Lu 127 Pan L6a6 BUS L R o Immediately after the power is turned on Pstn Position will be R Right Range Zone Range will be 012 Keys and Orig K Original Key Position will be Btm Bottom so that indexes will be created as shown below MS 881 NeuMS 661 Index EER 665 ao rmm add dd m If you set Range Zone Range to 1 Key an index will be created for each note of the keyboard Itis convenient to use 1 Key when you wish to sample numerous takes in succession such as when recording phrases or rhythm loops Index E E 824 illiid dlddddddliuil Basic fundions ao MT T ca Select Index Index can also be selected by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on keyboard For this example select 001 Assign a sample to the Index If sampling RAM m
308. tings for them i p 113 Master Effect settings 7 2 Ed MasterFX Here you can select master effects and make settings for them The master EQ is also set here rs p 113 ic functions Program mode 55 56 More about Alternate Modulation Alternate Modulation is a type of modulation that can be used to control various aspects of the sound AMS Alternate Modulation Source refers to any of the numerous sources that can control alternate modu lation and includes controllers that you operate physi cally such as the joystick and realtime controllers incoming MIDI data as well as modulators such as the EG or LFO Since this instrument allows you apply modulation to a modulator this type of control is referred to as alter nate modulation Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree speed or depth to which AMS will control alternate modula tion Combinations of modulations that are frequently used in on the synthesizer performance such as using the joystick to vary the pitch are also provided as special parameters separately from alternate modulation This instrument provides 29 types of alternate modula tion In single mode you can use 29 alternate modulation destinations of 29 types and in double mode you can use 55 alternate modulation destinations of 29 types There are 42 AMS sources However depending on the type of modulation some sources cannot be selected For details on alternate modul
309. tings to memory p 43 noe The settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved 119 ic functions Other functions Adjusting the contrast brightness of the LCD screen Use the GLOBAL 1 1 System Preference page LCD Contrast to make adjustments p 121 PG p 127 Using this instrument as a data filer MIDI exclusive data transmitted from an external device can be received by this instrument and saved on an SD card the Data Filer function This is done using the Media mode Save page Save Exclusive PG p 154 Tap tempo control A tap tempo control function is available in Program Combination and Sequencer modes While the arpeggiator or sequencer is playing in any of these modes you can control the playback tempo in real time by lightly pressing the TIMBRE TRACK key several times at the desired tempo This function is convenient when you want to match the playback tempo of the arpeggiator or sequencer playback to another beat in real time The Tap tempo feature also provides real time control over any BPM or tempo based effects The following example shows the procedure for using Tap tempo in Program mode In Program mode select C004 HipHop Kit Program Proaram Select Category 15 Drums lrrogromMtredit tag J MI In the PROG 1 1 Play select the Are Play page and check the Latch check box ME rp Play Program Select 004 HipHop Kit Rrpegsi
310. too Press the INC key to check the check box If this is checked a drum pattern will be copied to the song after the template song is loaded Press the F8 OK key to load the template song A dialog box will appear Copy Pattern to Track Pio aiia 1 Std2 Measure 881 Make sure that Preset P109 AcidJazz 1 Std2 is selected at the right of Pattern If not use the VALUE controller to select it You can press the START STOP key to hear the selected pattern To stop press the START STOP key once again Press the F6 Copy key to copy the pattern The Measure value will change from 001 to 009 This indicates that the pattern has been copied from measure 1 to measure 8 and that the next time you press the F6 Copy key the pattern will be cop ied from measure 9 To Track 61 Copy Pattern to Track Pattern P189 AcidJazz 1 Std2 Measure 669 To Track 81 Press the F7 Exit key In the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Play REC page the Song Select field will indicate S000 Acid Jazz Song Select REC La FTH i AE Song Select 4 188 Manu 1 1 0t 1 Ui UU Meter 4 4 Reso Hi 000 Acid Jazz L RPPR T81 Drums T81 Eo0z standard Kit z Ch lal RECN Frog 2M proa tell Mis 2 Wintel Pref J CIT Track Select note Preset patterns can be used in a song even after the above steps This can be done by using the Utility menu commands Put Pattern or Copy Patter
311. tor A Select the SEQ 3 1 Param1 MIDI T09 10 page and for track 9 or any unused track turn Status Off and set the MIDI Channel to 01 T09 will be a dummy track used to trigger arpeg giator B Select the SEQ 6 1 Arp Setup T09 16 page Set the track 9 Assign to B This will produce the following settings Track Assign Status MIDI Ch This completes the corrections In the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page set Track Select to any track whose MIDI channel is 01 Check the Multi REC check box and perform multi track recording 79 80 Caution and other functions in Sequencer mode TR song data and its compatibility The following two types of song data can be loaded from SD card into this instrument s sequencer Song data saved in this instrument s own format This data is only for this instrument However it is partially compatible with the TRITON TRITON pro TRITONproX TRITON Rack Multi TRI TON Le TRITON STUDIO TRITON Extreme and KARMA Music Workstation PG p 250 It cannot be loaded into other instruments Since the performance will be faithfully reproduced including detailed settings of this instrument you should use this format to save song data that is intended for playback on this instrument Standard MIDI Files This format is not able to provide a totally faithful reproduction of the performance on this instrument in the way
312. ttern 107 About user arpeggio patterns 107 Editing a user arpeggio pattern 107 Dual arpeggiator editing 110 Synchronizing the arpeggiator 111 Synchronization between arpeggiators A Eug Q 111 Synchronization between the arpeggiators and sequencer in Sequencer mode 111 Synchronization with an external sequencer in Program Combination or Sequencer Iodes teretes 111 Effects settings sssss 112 Effects in each mode 112 Routing settings and effect settings 112 Effect settings for a program 112 Effect settings in combination and song 114 Effect settings in Sampling mode requires the EXB SMPL option ee 114 Effect settings for the AUDIO INPUT requires the EXB SMPL option 115 About dynamic modulation Dmod 115 Other functions ens 117 Tuning to another instrument Transposing en nnn 117 Bypassing the effects 117 Specifying the function of the Assignable Switch and Assignable Pedal 117 Selecting different Velocity and Aftertouch CUIVeS sienne nn 118 Creating original scales 118 Changing the scale e 118 Setting the function of SW 1 and SW 2 119 Setting the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTR
313. ttings the arpeggio may not start when you press the ARP ON OFF key to turn it on p 29 27 Quick Start Using the arpeggiator while you play Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo D Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT key to make the right C LED light Rotate the TEMPO knob to adjust the tempo The J value in the upper right of the LCD screen will change You can set this in the range of 40 240 The SELECT key LED will blink at quarter note J intervals You can also Use the cursor keys a a v gt to select J input the tempo using numeric keys 0 9 and press the ENTER key to set the tempo Alternatively you can set the tempo using the VALUE dial or the INC DEC keys The tempo will blink at the specified tempo note You can also tap the TIMBRE TRACK key Tap Tempo to set the tempo p 120 noe The Tempo setting is saved when you write the program nole The arpeggio playback speed is affected by the Reso Resolution setting 1 1 Play Arp Play page 6 1 Ed Arp Arpeg Setup page m If MIDI Clock GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI is set to External or Ext USB the display will indicate J EXT The tempo will be synchronized to an exter nal MIDI device and it will not be possible to adjust the tempo on the TR Adjusting the length of the arpeggio notes Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT key to make the right C LED light Rotate the ARP GATE
314. u want to record Set the Recording Mode to Loop All Tracks SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page REC Setup If Multi REC is checked it will not be possible to select Loop All Tracks Flay REC Frog eM prog telling Tte pres TONNEN In Loop Start Meas Loop End Meas specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M004 M008 recording will occur repeatedly as a loop from measure 4 to measure 8 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key Playback will begin When you reach the starting location you specified in step S recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you reach the ending location you specified in step you will return to the starting location and continue recording The musical data that is loop recorded will be added to the previously recorded data 6 You can also erase specific data even while you continue loop recording If you press the REC WRITE key during loop recording all musical will be removed from the cur rently selected track as long as you continue press ing the key By checking the Remove Data check box you can erase only the specified data During loop record ing press the note that you wish to delete and only t
315. uencer s MIDI OUT are connected by a MIDI cable If they are not connected turn off the power make the connection and then turn the power back on again PG p 233 Set the MIDI Clock GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI page MIDI Clock to External or Ext USB so that this instrument will synchronize to the MIDI clock of the external sequencer PG p 129 GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI MIDI Clock MIDI Channel i MIDI Filter Note Receive ATI i rjEnable Program Change MIDI Clock S iBank Combi Convert Position PreMIDI r RfterT Local Control on i DExclusive Lawo o LT ctr Change 8 Create a new song and in the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Preference page check the Multi REC check box Set the Recording Mode to Over Write Select the SEQ 1 1 Play REC Program page For the tracks that you are not recording set PLAY MUTE REC to PLAY or MUTE In SEQ 3 1 Param1 MIDI page MIDI Channel specify the MIDI channel for each track The specified channel of musical data will be recorded on that track It is a good idea to set tracks 1 16 to MIDI channels 1 16 This is the default set ting Also make sure that Status is set either to INT or BTH Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 Press the REC WRITE key to enter recording standby mode Start the external sequencer The TR sequencer will receive the MIDI Start mes sage transmitted by the external sequencer
316. unded by the arpeggio pattern U143 INT Dr In The Pocket The T5 program A066 Chord Trigger will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern U100 INT Bs Echo The B Key Btm and Key Top COMBI 6 1 Ed Arp Scan Zone page are set so that arpeggiators B will operate only for the G3 note and above Arpeggiator B is assigned to T8 as well but this setting is so that the T7 program C004 HipHop Kit will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Refer to the preceding section Select and play Combination A021 Urban Nature RnB Linking the arpeggiator to the combi nation If you want the arpeggiator settings of a combination to become active when that combination is selected check Combi for Auto Arp GLOBAL 1 1 System Basic page Creating a user arpeggio pattern About user arpeggio patterns The patterns that can be selected on the TR s arpeggia tor are called arpeggio patterns There are two types of arpeggio patterns preset arpeggio patterns and user arpeggio patterns Preset arpeggio patterns There are five patterns UP DOWN ALTI ALT2 and RANDOM The operation of these patterns is fixed and cannot be edited User arpeggio patterns There are 216 patterns U000 INT U215 User which can develop chords or phrases in a wide variety of ways based on the pitches that you play on the keyboard or the timing at which you play them In GLOBAL 6 1 Arp Pattern you can modify these user arpeggio patt
317. using an external audio source and are playing only the internal programs combinations and songs you should set BUS IFX Indiv Select to Off or set Level to 0 If audio cables are not connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks the input to the TR will be 0 About dynamic modulation Dmod pz Dynamic modulation Dmod is a function that lets you use MIDI messages or the TR s controllers to con trol specific effect parameters in realtime BPM MIDI Sync is another function that controls effect parameters and is used to synchronize the LFO speed of modulation type effects or the delay time etc of delay type effects to the tempo of the arpeggiator or an external sequencer For details on each of these functions refer to PG p 221 Setting example We will show how you can use dynamic modulation to control an effect parameter in realtime D As described in the procedure for Effect settings for a program rs p 112 set IFX to 49 LCR BPM Delay Verify that a delay sound is being output 2 Select the PROG 7 1 Ed InsertFX IFX page Using the Dmod function to vary the delay level by pushing the joystick 3 Set InLvl Mod to 100 4 Set Sre to JS Y 1 The joystick will control the input level to the effect When you set Src to JS Y 1 the delay sound will no longer be output however it will gradually increase as you move the joystick away from your self IFX LCR BPM Dela P
318. utput of an external audio device or mixer or synthesizer connect the source to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks EXB SMPL AUDIO INPUT LEVEL MIC UNE MAX MIN ot 2 1 Q Q Q EXB SMPL CD player L IC AUX OUT I R CD Connect the L source to AUDIO INPUT jack 1 and the R source to jack 2 Make the settings described in steps of Connections and settings for a monaural source Set the Input 1 and Input 2 parameters to specify how the signal from the AUDIO INPUT jacks will be received by the TR Lvl adjusts the volume Set both Input 1 and Input 2 to 127 Pan adjust the panning Set Input 1 to L000 and Input 2 to R127 Set BUS For this example select L R for both Input 1 and Input 2 The settings in the example above will cause the sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks to be output in stereo from the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks and from the headphones The sound of AUDIO INPUT 1 will be output from the left and AUDIO INPUT 2 from the right 4 Use the LEVEL knob to adjust a suitable input level Refer to step 6 of Connections and set tings for a monaural source The LEVEL knob adjusts both AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 Using an insert effect The TR s insert effect can be applied to the sound that is being input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks allowing you to record a sample with effects applied As an ex
319. ving released all notes This setting is suit able when you are playing in realtime and want the arpeggio to start at the beginning of the measure If this is unchecked the arpeggio pattern will always be synchronized to the tempo of the MIDI clock For details on synchronization refer to Syn chronizing the arpeggiator p 111 Keyboard If this is checked the notes you play on the keyboard will be heard as well as the arpeg giated notes If this is unchecked only the arpeggiated notes will be heard The same setting can be made by editing the param eter of the same name or abbreviation in the PROG 1 1 Play Arp Play page m You can use the Utility Copy Arpeggiator to copy arpeggiator settings from another program or combination r PG p 25 In the Scan Zone page specify the range in which the arpeggiator will operate PROG 6 1 Ed firp Scan Zone Bottom Key Key Btm RENE Top 63 ALL Ulli Vel Btm 661 Top 127 Key Btm Key Top The arpeggiator will oper ate when you play keys within the specified range Keys outside of this range can be played in the nor mal manner and will not be affected by the arpeg giator on off nole For example if you set Pattern to P000 UP check Latch set Key Top to B3 and Key Btm to C 1 playing a note B3 or lower will trig ger the arpeggiator Since Latch is on the arpeg gio will continue even after you release the keys
320. xternal or Ext USB the TR will synchronize to MIDI Clock and Start messages received from an exter nal MIDI sequencer or similar device connected by a MIDI cable Synchronization to external MIDI clock The arpeggiator will synchronize to the Tempo based on the timing of the external MIDI clock Synchronization to the MIDI Start message When the arpeggiator is on and operating receiving a MIDI Start message will cause the arpeggiator to reset to the beginning of the pattern This has no relation to the Key Sync setting 111 ic functions Arpeggiator settings Effects settings The effect section of the TR provides one insert effect two master effects one master EQ stereo 3 band EQ and a mixer that controls the routing of these compo nents You can choose from 89 types of full digital effects for each effect The effects are categorized as follows Categories of the 89 effect types Sample AUDIO INPUT 1 2 Recording Insert Effect The external input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 if the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed can be used outside of Sampling mode In Program Combi nation and Sequencer modes the external input sound 01 15 Filter and dynamics effects such as EQ and com can be processed by the insert effect master effects pressor and master EQ 16 31 Pitch and phase m
321. y The cursor En will move Edit Buffer When you select a program or Input When you write the program or combination settings will be Write Select combination its data is called from saved in internal memory internal memory into the edit buffer Use the VALUE dial the INC DEC keys or cursor keys a 4 v gt to select Press the ENTER key or F6 Fk key The cursor will move Internal Memory Program Bank A 0 127 Combination Bank A 0 127 Repeat this step to input all the characters Press the F8 OK key If you selected Name in the dialog box of step 1 to access the text dialog box you will return to the previous dialog box Press the F8 OK key in that dialog box to execute the Rename operation If you selected TEXT in step 1 to access the text dialog box the Rename operation will be executed Writing global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns The settings you edit in Global mode can be written into internal memory This is done using the operations Write Global Setting Write User Drum Kits and Write User Arpeggio Patterns If you wish to use these settings after turning the power off be sure to write the data There are two ways to write global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns amp Before you write a user drum kit or user arpeggio pattern the Global mode memory protect setting mu
322. y sample recording will begin s p 35 START STO P key In Sequencer mode this key starts stops song record ing playback or cue list playback The key will blink in time with the beat during recording or playback In Sampling mode if the EXB SMPL option is installed press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key to start stop sample recording In the SMPL 2 1 2 Sample Edit Edit2 page pressing this key will sound the sample Rear panel UIR MUSIC WORKSTATION l rom Ww 1 SD card slot You can insert an SD card in this slot Refer to p 14 for details on inserting removing and handling media 2 USB B connector for connecting to a computer You can connect your computer to this connector Using a single USB cable your TR can send and receive MIDI information to and from a computer This elimi nates the need for a MIDI interface and the associated cables PG p 233 What is USB USB stands for Universal Serial Bus and is an interface for transferring data between a computer a keyboard and or peripheral devices amp The USB connector of the TR is only able to trans mit and receive MIDI data 7 6 5 43 21 3 POWER switch This switch turns the power on off p 18 4 AC power supply connector AC9V Connect this to the included AC AC power supply After connecting the power supply cable to TR con nect the other end to an
323. y be slightly skewed If this occurs try setting Reso Realtime Quantize Resolution to a setting other than Hi When you are finished performing press the START STOP key Recording will end and the sequencer will return to the location at which recording began If you made a mistake during your performance or would like to re record you can use the Compare function press the COMPARE key to re record as many times as you wish 8 If you want to record other tracks un check the Multi REC or RPPR check boxes as necessary In step uncheck the Multi REC check box to defeat multi track recording In step uncheck the RPPR check box to turn off the RPPR function Recording the sound of a combi nation or program Here s how you can easily copy the settings of a combi nation or program and then record There are two ways to do this While playing in Pro gram or Combination mode you can use the Auto Song Setup function to automatically set up a song using the current settings of the program or combina tion Or you can use the page menu command in Sequencer mode to copy the settings of a program or combination into the sequencer Auto Song Setup function The Auto Song Setup function automatically applies the settings stored with the current program or combi nation to a new song in the TR sequencer This allows you to capture your creative moments and perfor mances without having to
324. y set The settings that are automatically made when you execute the Auto Song Setup command are the same as if you execute the Copy From Combi PG p 52 utility menu command after making the fol lowing settings in the dialog box Check with Effects Set To to Track 1 to 8 Check Auto adjust Arp for Multi REC Program settings that are automatically set If you execute Auto Song Setup from Program mode the program will be selected for track 1 and the following settings will be made nsert effect master effect and master EQ settings of the program Arpeggiator settings of the program Controller Setup 2 2 Ed Ctrl settings of the program The TR will automatically enter record ready mode and the metronome will sound according to the Sequencer mode Pref Preference settings PG p 56 6 Press the START STOP key to begin realtime recording When you are finished recording press the START STOP key once again v p 81 Real time recording Copy From Combi Sequencer mode page menu commands Here s how to use the Copy From Combi page menu commands in Sequencer mode EJ Make sure that the global MIDI channel GLOBAL 2 1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 D Create a new song rp 71 SER 1 1 Play REC Play REC s 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 Reso Hi 005 NEW SONG s 120 Manu CORPPR T81 TRACK 81 TOS hi3 Sweep Stab Cho kelay RecProa 2p roge Min 2 Ae Pres A 2 Exe
325. yright law and may be liable for damages and penalties If you are unsure of your rights to the material please con sult a legal specialist Company names product names and names of formats etc are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Thank you for purchasing the Korg TR music workstation To ensure trouble free enjoyment please read this manual carefully and use the instrument as directed About this manual The owner s manuals and how to use them The TR come with the following owner s manuals Operation Guide Parameter Guide Voice Name List included in the CD ROM Operation Guide First read this manual carefully to gain a basic under standing of the instrument and to learn basic opera tion Introduction explains the function of each part how to make connections basic operation and gives an overview of each mode Quick Start explains basic topics selecting sounds convenient functions for performance If you wish to begin playing immediately read this section first Basic Functions contains mode by mode explana tions of what you need to know to edit sounds record on the sequencer and record samples If the separately sold EXB SMPL option is installed This section also explains how to use the arpeggiator effects Appendices contains information on troubleshoot ing specifications and various other information Parameter Gu

Korg 2E ii Electronic Keyboard User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents